415
8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 1/415 INGLÉS 1er Grado I

Ingles Tomo i

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 1/415

INGLÉS

1er Grado

I

Page 2: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 2/415

La elaboración de Inglés I. Apuntes estuvo a cargo de la Dirección General de Materiales Educativos de laSubsecretaría de Educación Básica.

Secretaría de Educación Pública

 Josefina Vázquez Mota

Subsecretaría de Educación Básica José Fernando González Sánchez 

Dirección General de Materiales Educativos

María Edith Bernáldez Reyes 

Coordinación general

María Edith Bernáldez Reyes

Elaboración de textos

Claudia Yvette Gómez MartínezJezabel Barrera Fuentes

RevisiónMaría Cristina Martínez MercadoJorge Barbiere MejíaClaudia Elín Garduño Néstor

Asesoría pedagógica

Karina Bustos HernándezAlejandra Monserrat Castillo Robledo

Corrección de estilo

Estela Maldonado Chávez

Ilustración de portada e interiores

Marco Tulio Ángel Zárate

Formación y corrección

Dirección Editorial DGME

Primera edición, 2008 (ciclo escolar 2008-2009)

D.R. © Secretaría de Educación Pública, 2008Argentina 28, Centro,06020, México, D.F.

ISBN 978-968-01-1670-6

Impreso en MéxicoDISTRIBUCIÓN GRATUITA-PROHIBIDA SU VENTA 

Page 3: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 3/415

Índice

  Presentation / Presentación

  Introduction / Introducción

9  Classroom Language / Lenguaje en el salón de clases

10 Lesson 1 Hello! Goodbye!13 Lesson 2 How do you spell it?15 Lesson 3 How old are you?18 Lesson 4 Sit down!22 Lesson 5 When’s your birthday?25 Lesson 6 What’s the meaning of sharpener?

29 Unit 1 / Personal Identification / Identificación personal 

32 Lesson 1 At a party36 Lesson 2 Her name is Azucena39 Lesson 3 My father is a mechanic42 Lesson 4 I’m a student44 Lesson 5 What do you do?46 Lesson 6 Are you a student?49 Lesson 7 My school ID card52 Lesson 8 Where do you live?55 Lesson 9 I live in a small town57 Lesson 10 David is a soccer player 60 Lesson 11 At the archaeological site64 Lesson 12 Where are you from?66 Lesson 13 Are you from Brazil?69 Lesson 14 A creature from the space71 Lesson 15 Nationality means nacionalidad73 Lesson 16 What about your brother or sister?75 Lesson 17 Send me an e-mail77 Lesson 18 Rewiev

89 Unit 2. Actions in progress/ Acciones en progreso

92 Lesson 1 Sending an e-mail96 Lesson 2 This is Samuel´s sweater 99 Lesson 3 Whose are these shorts?103 Lesson 4 That is my favorite jacket106 Lesson 5 These blue jeans are comfortable109 Lesson 6 Are these your sunglasses?113 Lesson 7 Mini Check117 Lesson 8 Looking for Arturo121 Lesson 9 Speaking on the phone

Page 4: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 4/415

124 Lesson 10 Getting ready to the party127 Lesson 11 Enjoying a party132 Lesson 12 What’s happening at the party?135 Lesson 13 A day in Acapulco137 Lesson 14 Mini Check141 Lesson 15 Project: A class magazine Part one142 Lesson 16 Project: A class magazine Part two145 Lesson 17 Project: A class magazine Part three147 Lesson 18 Project: A class magazine Part four149 Lesson 19 Project: A class magazine Part five152 Lesson 20 Project: A class magazine Part six154 Lesson 21 Project: A class magazine Part seven155 Lesson 22 Review156 Lesson 23 Review159 Lesson 24 Review

169 Unit 3. Hobbies, leissure and sport/ Pasatiempos, tiempo libre y deporte

173 Lesson 1 I like playing videogames177 Lesson 2 I like to ride my bike180 Lesson 3 I like movies184 Lesson 4 I love soccer186 Lesson 5 My mother likes going to the movies190 Lesson 6 Mini Check194 Lesson 7 Do you like tennis?197 Lesson 8 Does your father like soccer?199 Lesson 9 Does she like cooking?203 Lesson 10 I like vegetables and fruits206 Lesson 11 David loves comics210 Lesson 12 Mini Check

213 Lesson 13 Would you like to go to a party?216 Lesson 14 Why don’t we go to the movies?218 Lesson 15 Let’s eat Mexican food221 Lesson 16 Shall we go to a rock concert?223 Lesson 17 Would you like to see a movie today?226 Lesson 18 No, thanks I hate horror movies228 Lesson 19 Project: We invite to you to our St Valentine’s celebration

Part one230 Lesson 20 Project: We invite to you to our St Valentine’s celebration

Part two231 Lesson 21 Review

243 Unit 4. Daily Life/Vida diaria

247 Lesson 1 Long distance call249 Lesson 2 It’s quarter past eight252 Lesson 3 What time is it?256 Lesson 4 What time does the next bus leave?259 Lesson 5 I start at 8 o´clock in the morning262 Lesson 6 I wake up at 11:30 am on Saturdays

Page 5: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 5/415

264 Lesson 7 Mini Check268 Lesson 8 Jessica gets up at 6 o’clock271 Lesson 9 Jessica loves basketball276 Lesson 10 He studies in Queens University280 Lesson 11 Does he wake up at half past five?284 Lesson 12 Romina doesn’t have a sister

286 Lesson 13 I visit the dentist twice a year289 Lesson 14 Mini Check293 Lesson 15 How often do you have English class?298 Lesson 16 Today is my birthday301 Lesson 17 Does she usually have breakfast at 8 o’clock?305 Lesson 18 Are you healthy?308 Lesson 19 Sending an e-mail312 Lesson 20 Crocodiles are endangered species315 Lesson 21 Elephants live in Africa318 Lesson 22 Do Bengal tigers live in the forest?321 Lesson 23 Where do grey whales travel in the winter?324 Lesson 24 Mini Check

327 Lesson 25 Project: Come and visit our school zoo Part one328 Lesson 26 Project: Come and visit our school zoo Part two330 Lesson 27 Project: Come and visit our school zoo Part three332 Lesson 28 Project: Come and visit our school zoo Part four334 Lesson 29 Review Part one339 Lesson 30 Review Part two

351 Unit 5. Places and buildings/Lugares y edificios

354 Lesson 1 Welcome to Puebla357 Lesson 2 I’m looking for a greengrocer361 Lesson 3 A brochure with interesting places

363 Lesson 4 Is there a bank near here?366 Lesson 5 Where is the bank?369 Lesson 6 This is a map of my town372 Lesson 7 Mini Check375 Lesson 8 The park is on Allende Street378 Lesson 9 Look at the map381 Lesson 10 Go straight, turn left, turn right384 Lesson 11 Welcome to my school387 Lesson 12 How can I get to the gas station?390 Lesson 13 How can I get to The Palace of Fine Arts?393 Lesson 14 Mini Check396 Lesson 15 How can I get to your house?399 Lesson 16 Project: A travel brochure Part one400 Lesson 17 Project: A travel brochure Part two401 Lesson 18 Project: A travel brochure Part three402 Lesson 19 Project: A travel brochure Part four402 Lesson 20 Project: A travel brochure Part five403 Lesson 21 Review

Page 6: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 6/415

Page 7: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 7/415

Presentación

 La Secretaría de Educación Pública, comprometida con la comunidad detelesecundaria —autoridades, docentes, alumnos, padres de familia—, se dio ala tarea de fortalecer el modelo de enseñanza-aprendizaje de esta modalidadeducativa. Este modelo fortalecido ofrece materiales que apoyan de manerasignificativa la comprensión y dominio de los contenidos de los planes deestudio vigentes.

La serie de Apuntes Bimodales de Telesecundaria está desarrollada para quemaestros y alumnos compartan un mismo material a partir del trabajo deproyectos, estudios de caso o resolución de situaciones problemáticas. Con

este objetivo se han desarrollado secuencias de aprendizaje que despiertan elinterés de los alumnos por la materia, promueven la interacción en el aula ypropician la colaboración y la participación reflexiva, además de que empleanuna evaluación que orienta las decisiones tanto del docente como del alumno yestablecen estrategias claras de vinculación con la comunidad.

Estos materiales, que la SEP  pone ahora en manos de alumnos y maestros,expone de manera objetiva los temas, conceptos, actitudes y procedimientosnecesarios para un mayor y mejor entendimiento de cada una de las materiasque comprende la serie.

El empleo de estos Apuntes Bimodales y las sugerencias que brinde lacomunidad de telesecundaria darán la pauta para el enriquecimiento y mejorade cada una de las ediciones de esta obra que busca contribuir a unaeducación equitativa y de calidad en el país.

SECRETARÍA DE EDUCACIÓN PÚBLICA 

Page 8: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 8/415

En los   de Inglés se utilizaron iconos que representan determinadas actividades. Loincluimos a continuación para facilitar su identificación y uso.

Speak / Hablar

Think / Pensar

Play / Jugar

Write / Escribir

Read / Leer

Page 9: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 9/415

 

Introduction/Introducción 

Classroom language / Lenguaje en el salón de clases

El alumno:

El propósito de esta unidad es proporcionar a los estudiantes algunas

expresiones básicas usadas dentro del salón de clase que le permitirán

comunicarse en Inglés durante las lecciones del idioma extranjero.

Purpose/Propósito

Topics/ Temas

Lesson 1 Hello! Goodbye!

Lesson 2 How do you spell it?

Lesson 3 How old are you?

Lesson 4 Sit down!

Lesson 5 When’s your birthday?

Lesson 6 What’s the meaning of sharpener ?

6 sessionss, 2 weeks / 6 sesiones, 2 semanas

Page 10: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 10/415

 

Hello! Goodbye!

Read

1. Look at the pictures.Match the conversation (1, 2, 3) to the pictures.Observa las imágenes. Escribe el número de la conversación correspondiente acada uno.

 _____   ___ ___

1)Bus driver: Good morning, My name is Paul. Welcome to the bus!Pedro: My name is Pedro. Good morning sir.Bus driver: Nice to meet you Pedro.

2)Pedro: Hi. My name is PedroOkan: Hello Pedro. I am Okan.Pedro: How are you?Okan: I’m fine, thanks. And you?Pedro: OK.

3)Bus driver: Have a nice day guys!Pedro: Bye Paul!Group of SS: Goodbye!Bus driver: See you in the afternoon!

Lesson 1

Page 11: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 11/415

 

2. Indicate   the time of the conversations.Indica        el tiempo en que se desarrollaron las conversaciones.

morning 

afternoon 

evening 

Think Write 

3. Complete the information. Use the words in the box.

Completa la información. Usa las palabras del cuadro.

Conversation 1) is ___________ and Conversation 2) is _____________.

4. Look at the pictures and complete the dialogue.Observa las imágenes y completa  los diálogos. 

Memo:

 Mr. Gómez:  

Good ________, Mr. Gómez.

 ________ morning Memo. ________ are you?I’m ________, thanks, and you?  ____________________________________

  Memo:Mr. Gómez:

Page 12: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 12/415

 

Ema:Rodrigo:Ema:Rodrigo:

 ________. My name is Ema. ________ Ema. __ am Rodrigo.How are ________?I’m fine, ________. 

Speak 

5. In pairs, create a dialogue, similar to the ones in 4. Then present it to the class.En parejas, elaboren un diálogo similar a los del ejercicio 4. Posteriormentepreséntenlo a la clase.

 ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________

6. Complete the chart.Completa el cuadro.

Greetings Time SpanishGood morning 6 a.m. – 12 p.m.Good afternoonGood evening

Farewells SpanishGood bye

Buenas nochesSee you Nos vemos

Page 13: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 13/415

 

How do you spell it?

Read1. Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.

Completa los espacios con las palabras del cuadro.

Teacher: Good morning class. I’m going to call the roll.Number one, Álvarez.

Álvarez: Present.Teacher: Number two, BonillaBonilla: Here.Teacher: Number _____________, Huerta

Student: Absent.Teacher: Number twelve, LinaresLinares: PresentTeacher: Number _____________, SuárezSuárez: Present.Teacher: Number twenty – three, Mmm ! Tes, tech..Texcalapa: It is Texcalpa.Teacher: How do you spell it?Texcalpa: T-E-X-C-A-L-P-ATeacher: OK. Number twenty – three,TexcalpaTexcalpa: PresentTeacher: Number twenty – nine, Viguera

Student: Absent.Teacher: Number _____________, ZapataZapata: Present.Teacher: OK. Let’s start the class.

Think 2. Look at the underlined words in the dialogue. Use them to complete thesesentences.

Completa las ideas con las palabras subrayadas en el diálogo.1. You answer ________ or ________ when you are in the class.2. You answer _________ when somebody is not in the class.3. Look at the words in bold in exercise 2. What do they mean?

Observa las palabras en negritas en el ejercicio 2. ¿Qué significan? 

Lesson 2

eighttwenty

thirty

Page 14: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 14/415

 

Write Speak

3. Look at the table below. Repeat the pronunciation of the letters.Observa la tabla anterior. Repite la pronunciación de las letras.

4. Create a classroom directory. Ask 5 partners for their full name. Ask them tospell their name or family name and take notes. Follow the example.

Crea un directorio. Pregunta a 5 compañeros su nombre completo. Pídelesque deletreen su nombre o su apellido y toma nota. Sigue el ejemplo.

LETRA LETRAA –ei N – enB –bi O – ouC – ci P – piD – di Q – quiuE – i R – arF – ef S – esG – yi T – ti

H – eich U – iuI – ai V – vi

J – yei W – dobliuK – kei X – ecsL – el Y – uai

M – em Z – dzi

What’s your name?It’s Alvarado

My name is Juan.What’s yourfamily name?How do you spellit?

A-L-V-A-R-A-D-O

Page 15: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 15/415

 

How old are you? 

Read1. Read the dialogue from the previous lesson again. Complete this table with themissing words. 

Lee otra vez el diálogo de la lección anterior. Completa la tabla con las palabrasque faltan.

MY CLASSROOM DIRECTORY Family name(s) Name

Lesson 3

NÚMEROS NUMBERS123 Three4 Four

5 Five6 Six7 Seven89 Nine

10 Ten11 Eleven1213 Thirteen14 Fourteen15 Fifteen16 Sixteen

17 Seventeen18 Eighteen19 Nineteen

o

Page 16: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 16/415

 

NÚMEROS NUMBERSTwenty

21 Twenty one22 Twenty two23

…….2930 Thirty31 Thirty one32 Thirty two…. ……40 Forty50 Fifty60 Sixt70 Seventy80 Eighty90 Ninety100 One hundred

Speak

2. Practice saying the numbers.Practica repitiendo los números. 

Think

3. Look at the numbers 21 – 29, 31 – 39, 41 – 59, etc. What do they have incommon? How are these numbers formed in English? Write the rule.

Observa los números 21-29, 31-39, 41-59, etc. ¿qué tienen en común? Cómo esque estos números se forman en inglés? Escribe la regla.

 ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________

Write

4. Answer the following questions about yourself.Contesta las siguientes preguntas.

y

Page 17: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 17/415

 

How old are you? I am __________________ years old.How old is your teacher? He/she is ______________ years old.How old is your best friend? He/she is ______________ years old.How old is your mother? She is ________________ years old.How old is your father? He is _________________ years old.

Speak

5. Ask your partner the questions above. Write his/her answers.Realiza las preguntas del ejercicio anterior a tu compañero y anota sus

respuestas.

Partner’s name: ____________________Age: ____________________Teacher’s age: ____________________Best friend’s age: ____________________Mother’s age: ____________________Father’s age: ____________________

6. Write the result with the word in English. Follow the example.Escribe el resultado en inglés de las siguientes operaciones. Fíjate en el

ejemplo .

20 + 5 = twenty five 60 - 2 = ______________________30 - 1 = ______________________ 70 + 3 = ______________________30 - 8 = thirty eight 9 x 9 = ______________________40 + 6 = ______________________90 + 4 = ______________________

7. With numbers you can say your age.Con los números también puedes decir tu edad.

How old are you? I am twelve years old.How old is María? She is thirteen years old.How old is Luis? He is fourteen years old.

How old is Sarah? ______________________

Page 18: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 18/415

 

How old is he? ________________________

Sit down!

Read

1. Look at the pictures in exercise 2. Are these situations familiar to you? Observa las imágenes en el ejercicio 2. ¿Te son familiares estas situaciones?

2. Match the pictures (1,2,3) with the dialogues.Escribe sobre la línea el número que relacione la imagen con el di logo.

1) 2) 3)

Lesson 4

á

Page 19: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 19/415

 

Think 

3. Look at the dialogues in 2 again. The teacher is giving some instructions. What are they?¿Cuáles son las instrucciones que está dando el profesor en los diálogos del ejercicio

anterior?

Yes, Peter closethe door!

Sit down, please! And openyour book at page 25

Everybody, be quiet please!If you want to talk please raiseyour hand!

I´m sorry.I´m late!May I come in?

Page 20: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 20/415

 

4. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

Circle

Underline

Work in pairs

Complete

Read

Listen

Work in teams

5. Circle the best option.Encierra la opción que se relacione con el dibujo.

a) Open your book.b) Close your book.

a) Stand up.b) Sit down.

a) Listen to the teacher.b) Listen to the CD.

Page 21: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 21/415

 

Think 

6. Write the answer on the line.Escribe la respuesta sobre la línea.

Commands always start with a :___________________a) verbb) noun

7. Match the pictures with the instructions.Relaciona las imágenes con las instrucciones .

A B

C D

E F

Open the window. _______Close the door. _______Please, stand up. _______Sit down. _______Be quiet! _______May I come in? ______

Page 22: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 22/415

 

When’s your birthday?

1. Look at the calendar. Complete it with the words in the box.

Observa el calendario. Completa la información con las palabras del cuadro.

2. Complete the information.Completa la información.

St. Valentine´s Day is on 14 th FebruaryFlag´s day is on _____________________

Lesson 5

October May July April February December

Sun

Mon

Tues

Wed

Thurs

Fri

Sat

Sun

Mon

Tues

Wed

Thurs

Fri

Sat

Sun

Mon

Tues

Wed

Thurs

Fri

Sat

Sun

Mon

Tues

ed

Thurs

Fri

Sat

January31 days 28 days (29 every four

years)

March31 days 30 days

31 days

June30 days 31 days

 Augus t31 days

September30 days 31 days 30 days

December31 days

Page 23: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 23/415

 

Spring starts on _____________________Children’s day is on _____________________Mother’s day is on _____________________Columbus day is on _____________________Christmas day is on _____________________

Read

3. Read the dialogues and complete the chart.Lee los diálogos y completa el cuadro.

1)Alessandra: César, when’s your birthday?César: It’s on 2nd April.2)Alessandra: Susan, when’s your birthday?Susan: It’s on 19th  June.

3)Alessandra: Pamela, when’s your birthday?Pamela: It’s on 21st  March.4)Alessandra: Joe, when’s your birthday?Joe: It’s on 23rd November.

My Birthday Calendar

Think4. Choose the answers.

Selecciona la respuesta.1) We use _________ to tell dates. a) on b) in

2) We use ________ to tell the date.a) ordinal numbers (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th…)b) cardinal numbers (1, 2, 3, 4, …)

Page 24: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 24/415

 

3) Months of the year start with __________a) small letterb) capital letter

Speak Write

5. Make your own Birthday Calendar.Elabora tu propio calendario de cumpleaños.

6. Look at the calendar below. Complete it with the dates (ordinal numbers:1st, 2nd,etc.)

Observa el calendario. Complétalo con las fechas (números ordinales: 1st , 2 nd ,

etc.)

MAY 200___

Sun Mon Tue Wed Thurs Fri Sat

1st  2nd 3rd 4th  5th 6th

7th 8th 

21st 22nd

28 29th

Page 25: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 25/415

 

7. Order the letters to form the days of the week.Ordena las letras para formar el nombre de un día de la semana y escríbelo

sobre la línea.

Sun  n / y / s / d / u / a _____________________Mon  o / n / d / m / a / y _____________________Tues  s / t / a / u / d / e / y _____________________

Wed  d / e / w / n / a / s / d / y / e _____________________Thurs  d / y / h / t / a / r / u _____________________Fri  y / d / a / r / f / i _____________________Sat  t / r / a / y / a / s / u / d _____________________

What’s the meaning of sharpener ?

Read write

1. Read the dialogue between Miss. Suárez and Juan’s mother then complete thelist on the blackboard.

Lee el diálogo entre la maestra y la mamá de Juan. Completa en el pizarrón lalista.

Miss Suárez: Good morning Juan.Juan: Good morning Miss. Suárez. This is my mother. She wants to know

the list of items for the class.

Miss. Suárez: Of course. The students will need a dictionary, a notebook, asharpener, an eraser, a pen, a pencil, scissors, glue and colors.Juan, copy the list on the blackboard, please.

Juan’s mother: Thank you Miss. Suárez. Bye.

Lesson 6

 

 

   

 

 

Page 26: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 26/415

 

Miss. Suárez: Have you finished to copy?Students: Yes.Juan: Excuse me, what’s the meaning of sharpener?Miss. Suárez: It is an item you use to sharpen your pencil.Lucía: And, what’s the meaning of scissors?Miss. Suárez: You use it to cut. And in a dictionary you can find the meaning of

many words.

Think

2. Circle the words which are not a school object.Encierra las palabras que no sean un objeto del salón de clase.

scissors pen

sharpener dog blackboardbook eraser waterflower notebook twentypencil cat dictionary

3. Look at the pictures and write in circle the number to match them with the word.Observa la imagen y escribe el número en cada círculo para relacionar la palabracon el dibujo. 

six

Page 27: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 27/415

 

4. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

What’s the question that Juan and Lucía use to ask for the meaning of a word?

 ___________________________________________________________________

What’s the meaning of sharpener ? ___________________________________________________________________

What’s the meaning of scissors ? ___________________________________________________________________

Read

5. Read the text.Lee el texto.

Hi, my mane is Jorge. I’m Thirteen years old. I’m a student in secondary school. Ilike English class and this is my book. This is my notebook, this is my dictionary, thisis my pen and these are my colors. That is my pencilcase, that is my ID card andthat is my lunch.

Page 28: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 28/415

 

Write

6. Describe the items you have in your schoolbag and draw it. Use Jorge’s example.Describe lo que llevas en tu mochila e ilústralo. Usa el ejemplo de Jorge.

 ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________

Page 29: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 29/415

Unit 1Personal Identification/Identificación personal

INGLÉS  I

Page 30: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 30/415

Page 31: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 31/415

 

Unit 1 

Personal identification / Identificación personal

El alumno:

El propósito de esta unidad es que los estudiantes tengan la habilidad depresentarse y presentar a otros así como proporcionar detalles personales.

Purpose/Propósito

Topics / Temas

 Lesson 1 At a partyLesson 2 Her name is Azucena.Lesson 3 My father is a mechanic.Lesson 4 I’m a student.Lesson 5 What do you do?Lesson 6 Are you a student?Lesson 7 My school ID card.Lesson 8 Where do you live?Lesson 9 I live in a small town.Lesson 10 David is a soccer player.Lesson 11 At the archaeological site.Lesson 12 Where are you from?Lesson 13 Are you from Brazil?Lesson 14 A creature from space.Lesson 15 Nationality means nacionalidad. Lesson 16 What about your brother or sister?Lesson 17 Send me an e-mail.Lesson 18 Review.18 sessions, 6 weeks / 18 sesiones, 6 semanas 

Page 32: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 32/415

 

At a party. 

Read

1)

Lesson 1

 

1. Look at the pictures. Write the expressions to complete the conversation.

Observa las imágenes. Escribe en los espacios las expresiones para lograr unaconversación.

Page 33: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 33/415

 

2)

3)

Page 34: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 34/415

 

2. Write 1 or 3 to order the conversation.Escribe 1 o 3 para ordenar la conversación.

 ______Marcos: Nice to meet you, too.Hugo: Nice to meet you, too.

2___  Carolina: Look that is my friend Lucía.

Lucía! Come, please.Carolina: Lucía this is Hugo and this is Marcos.Lucía: Nice to meet you.

 ______Carolina: Hello! My name is Carolina. What’s your name?Marcos: Hi! I’m Marcos and this is my friend Hugo.Hugo: Nice to meet you.

Think 

3. Underline the correct word.Subraya la palabra adecuada.

This / That This / That

4. Underline the correct sentence.Subraya la oración correcta.

a) Look, María! that is my brother. a) This is my friend Jorge Luis.b) María, this is my brother. b) That is my friend Jorge Luis.

Page 35: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 35/415

 

Write

5. Write this or that.Escribe this o that   sobre la línea. 

1. Look! Susana, ____________ is my sister .

2. I live in ______________ yellow house.

.

3. _____________ is my schoolbag.

Page 36: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 36/415

 

Lesson 2

Her name is Azucena.

Read1. Read the text.

Lee el texto.

Good morning. I’m Ruben. I want to talk about my family. This is my mother, her  name is Azucena and this is my father, his  name is Fernando. He is a teacher. Ihave two brothers, their names are Joaquin and Jorge. I have one sister, her  nameis Sofía. My brothers and me play soccer every Sunday in the team “Los rayos”. Myfather is our  coach. He is my favorite soccer player.

Think

2. Write who make reference to the words.Escribe a quién se refieren las palabras siguientes.

1. Her (line 1) refers to: Azucena 

2. His (line 2) refers to: __________________________

3. Their (line 3) refers to: __________________________

4. Her (line 3) refers to: __________________________

5. Our (line 5) refers to: __________________________

Page 37: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 37/415

 

6. My (line 4) refers to: ___________________________

3. Write the names.Escribe los nombres.

PersonalPronouns

Possessiveadjectives

I MyYou YourHe HisShe Her

It ItsThey TheirWe Our

Mother Father __________________ ___________________

Son Daughter

 _______ _______ _______ ______________Brother Brother Brother Sister

Page 38: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 38/415

 

Write

4. Write the correct word to complete the sentences.Escribe la palabra o palabras que hagan falta para completar las oraciones .

Mariana is my sister. She is a secretary.

Luis is my brother. _____________ is twelve years old.My mother is a nurse. ___________ name is Victoria.My father is thirty five years old. __________ name is Fernando.Luis and Toño are my cousins. ___________ study at secondary school.I am Jorge Luis. ____________ favorite sport is soccer.

5. Complete the family tree. Write the names of the members of your family.Completa el árbol genealógico con los miembros de tu familia. Escribe susnombres sobre la línea.

Grandfather

 _______ 

Mother _________

Sister _________

Uncle _________

Niece _________

Nephew _________

Father _________

Son _________

Grandmother

 _______ 

Aunt _________

Page 39: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 39/415

 

6. Write a short text about your family and draw it. Escribe un pequeño texto como el de Rubén para describir a tu familia y usa el

espacio para dibujarla.

 ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________

My father is a mechanic.

Read1. Read the next text.

Lee el siguiente texto

At the classroomEn el salón de clase.

Laura is presenting her father to her classmates.Laura presenta a su papá con sus compañeros de clase.

My father is a mechanic. His name is Alonso Hernández. He’s 40 years old. He

has his own business, he knows everything about mechanics. He has too muchexperience, such like 20 years. His labor is to repair all kind of motors like trucks,double decker busses, cars and motorcycles. He is the best mechanic in all mycommunity. I’m  the youngest I have two brothers. They’re  always helping myfather with his job.

Lesson  3  

My family

Page 40: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 40/415

 

Write

3. Write the contractions.Escribe las contracciones.

e.g. They are they’re

He is _____________________________I am _____________________________She is _____________________________It is _____________________________You are _____________________________We are _____________________________

FOCUS ON LANGUAGE

Pronoun + Verb to be = ContractionI + am = I’m

Think

4. Select the answer and write it on the line.Selecciona la repuesta y escríbela sobre la línea.

We use an ________ to join two words.a) (’) apostropheb) (,) comma

 2. Answer the questions.

Responde las preguntas.

What does her father do?He is a ________________________________________________What´s the name of her father? __________ ____________________________________________

What´s his last name? ______________________________________________________How old is he? ______________________________________________________How many years does have of experience? _______________________________________________________

Page 41: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 41/415

 

Write

5. Answer the questions using the words in the box.

Responde las siguientes preguntas usando las palabras del cuadro .

e.g. Who is this? (he is the son of my mother) That´s my brother.Who are they? (they are the daughters of my uncle) Those are my nieces

Who is this? (He is the father of my father) __________________________

Who is this? (She is the wife of my father) __________________________

Who is this? (She is the daughter of my parents)  __________________________Who is this? (He is the brother of my father)  __________________________Who is this? He is the son of my grandfather

 __________________________Who is this? (She is the wife of my grandfather)

 __________________________Who is this? (She is the wife of my uncle)

 __________________________

Who are they? (They are the sons of my uncle) __________________________

Think

6. The question: Who is this? is used to ask:Escribe a qué se refiere la pregunta: Who is this?

 ____________________________________________________________

sister  father grandmothermother uncle aunt cousins

grandfather 

Page 42: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 42/415

 

Write

7. Write a paragraph describing the occupation of somebody of your family

members.Escribe un párrafo en dónde describas la ocupación de algún miembro de tu

familia.

 __________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________________________

Lesson  4  

I’m a student.

Read

1. Read the textLee el texto.

 

My name is Robert Smith. I’m aBritish writer. I’m 75 years old.My birthday is on 21st June. Ilive in 312 Rivolli Street, Paris,France. My telephone numberis 34 56 89. My e-mailaddress [email protected] I haveone brother. His name is Tom.He is a photographer.

Page 43: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 43/415

 

Write

2. Complete the information.

Completa la información.

First name: _____________________________Last name: _____________________________Occupation: _____________________________Address: _____________________________E-mail: _____________________________Last name: _____________________________Nationality: _____________________________Telephone number: _____________________________Date of birth: _____________________________

3. Draw yourself.Dibújate.

4. Write a text with your personal information similar to text 1.Escribe un texto con tu información personal, tomando como ejemplo el que

aparece al inicio de la lección.

I´m…..____________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________________________ 

 __________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________________________  __________________________________________________________________

Page 44: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 44/415

 

Speak

5. Present your personal information to the classroom.Presenta tus datos personales ante la clase.

Lesson 5 

 

What do you do?

Read 

1. Read the dialogue.

Lee el diálogo.

 At a Journal.

En una editorial de periódico.

Karla : Hi. My name is Karla

Robert: I´m Robert. What do you do?

 Are you a model?

Karla: No, I´m a journalist and you?

Robert: I´m a photographer.

I work here.

Karla: Cool! I’m looking for a job.

Robert: Good luck!

Nice to meet you!

Karla: Nice to meet you too!

Thanks!

Page 45: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 45/415

 

Think

2. How do we ask someone for their occupation?

¿ Cómo preguntamos por la ocupación del alguien?.

 __________________________________________________________________

3. Write on the line the article according to the sentence.Escribe sobre la línea el artículo según corresponda.

Article _____ is used with words starting with a vowel soundArticle _____ is used with words starting with a consonant sound 

4. Match the occupations with the drawings.Relaciona las ocupaciones con los dibujos.

A mechanic

A soccer player

An engineer

A plumber

An actress

aan

Page 46: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 46/415

 

Write

5. Write a  or an  in the blanks.Escribe a o an sobre la línea según corresponda.

 _____ doctor _____ accountant _____ engineer _____ journalist _____ policeman _____ teacher _____ lawyer _____ designer _____ plumber

6. Interview your partner and write down the information you get.Entrevista a tu compañero y escribe la información que obtengas.

Use the key questions: What do you do? I´m a student.

What does your father do? He’s a carpenter.What does your mother do? She’s a nurse.

1) ______________________________________2) ______________________________________3) ______________________________________

Lesson 6 

Are you a student?

Read

1. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Ema and Luis are looking at Ema’s album.Ema y Luis están viendo el álbum de Ema.

Page 47: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 47/415

 

Luis: Who is this Ema?Ema: That’s me!

Luis: How old are you?Ema: I´m twelve years old.

Luis: Are you a student?

Yes, I am a student.And you?

Luis: No, I’m a secondary teacher.Who is this?

Emma: That´s my grandmother!

Luis: How old is she?Emma: She’s 79 years old.

Luis: What does she do?

2. Answer the next questions according to the dialogue above.Responde las siguientes preguntas de acuerdo al diálogo anterior.

e.g. Are Emma and Luis students? No, they aren’t.Is Emma twelve years old? Yes, she is.

Is Emma a student?

 __________________________________________________________

Is Luis a journalist? __________________________________________________________

Is Ema’s grandmother 79 years old? ___________________________________________________________

Think3. Complete the information. Write on the line if the sentences are affirmative ornegative.

Page 48: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 48/415

 

Completa la información. Escribe sobre la línea si las oraciones son afirmativaso negativas.

1) Are you a student?Yes, I am. ______________________No, I’m not. ______________________

2) Isn’t she a teacher?Yes, she is. ______________________No, she isn’t. ______________________

3) Is it hard to be an architect?Yes, it is. ______________________No, it isn’t. ______________________

Write

4. Complete the dialogue.Completa el diálogo.

Tomas: Hi. Are you a student?Liu: Yes, I am . My name is  Liu Huang.Tomas: I _____ sorry. Please say that again. ______ your first name Lou

Huang?Liu: No, it _____ Lou. ______ L-I-U.Tomas: OK! ______ today your first day here?Liu: Yes, it _____.Tomas: Nice to meet you!Liu: Nice to meet you too! See you later.

Speak

5. Practice the dialogue 4 with your partners.Practica el diálogo 4 con tus compañeros.

affirmative

negative

Page 49: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 49/415

 

My school ID card.

Read

Teacher: Good morning!Student: Good morning, teacher.Student: Hello, Miss.Miss: Hi. Show me your ID card students.Miss: Where is your ID card Juan?Juan: I lost it Miss.Miss: You need a new ID.

remember we will visit the zootomorrow.

Think

Lesson 7

 

1. Circle the correct option.Encierra la opción correcta.

Juan needs the school identification card to visit :

a) a museum b) a supermarket c) a zoo

 An identification card contains:

a) name, last name, age b) a conversation c) a favorite T.V program

Page 50: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 50/415

 

Read write

2. Read the conversation. Then complete the ID card.Lee la conversación. Después completa la credencial.

Juan: Good morning. I need a new ID card.Secretary: Yes, of course. What’s your name?Juan: JuanSecretary: And, what’s your last name?Juan: HernándezSecretary: How old are you?Juan: I’m thirteen years old.Secretary: What’s your group?Juan: I’m in first grade, group B.

Think

3. Answer the questions. How do we ask for personal details?Contesta las preguntas. ¿Cómo preguntamos por detalles personales?

a) _________________________________________ name?b) _________________________________________surname?c) _________________________________________ address?d) _________________________________________ telephone number?

How do we ask for someone’s age?

¿Cómo preguntamos por la edad de alguien?

 _______________________________________________________

SECONDARY SCHOOL

Name:_____________________

Last name: _________________

Age: ______________________

Group: ____________________

Page 51: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 51/415

 

Speak4. Interview a classmate and complete the ID card.

Entrevista a un compañero (a) y completa la credencial.

5. Answer the questions with personal information.Contesta las preguntas con tu información personal.

a) What’s your name? __________________________________________________b) What’s your last name?

 __________________________________________________c) How old are you?

 ___________________________________________________d) What’s your mother’s name?

 ______________________________________________e) What’s your father’s name?

 _______________________________________________

6. Complete your ID car with personal information and paste your photograph ordraw.

Escribe los datos a tu credencial y pega tu foto o dibújate.

SECONDARY SCHOOL

Name:_____________________

Last name: _________________

Age: ______________________

Group: ____________________

SECONDARY SCHOOL 

Name:________________________

Last name: ____________________

Age: _________________________

Group: _______________________

photo

Page 52: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 52/415

 

Where do you live?

Read

David is an American astronaut. He lives inNew York. He’s thirty five years old. Hehas a brother, his name is Tom and he livesin Dallas. He also has a sister, her name isSally and she is a teacher. She lives inHouston. Their parents live in Houston too.

1. Circle T  (True) or F  (False).Encierra T ( True- verdadero) si la oración es verdadera o F   ( False-falso) si

es falsa.

a) David is an engineer. T Fb) He is thirty five years old. T Fc) Tom lives in Dallas. T Fd) Sally is an astronaut. T Fe) Sally lives in Houston. T Ff) Their parents live in New York. T Fg) David lives in New York. T F

Lesson 8

Page 53: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 53/415

 

Think 2. Match the columns.

Relaciona las columnas.

 ______ Name a) How old are you?

 ______ City b) What’s your name?

 ______ Last name c) Where do you live?

 ______ Age d) What’s your last name?

Read3. Read the dialogue

Lee el diálogo  

Mariana: Hello! boys and girls.I want to invite you to mybirthday party.

Jorge: When is your birthday?Mariana: It is on July 6th, next Saturday.Marcos: Where do you live?Mariana: I live in downtown.

Lucía: What’s your address?Mariana: It is 5, Miguel Hidalgo Street.

It is near of the school.Will you go?

Claudia: Yes, of course.Marcos: Sure.Mariana: Ok, see you on Saturday at five

o’clock.

Page 54: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 54/415

 

Write

4. Complete the invitation card. Completa la invitación para la fiesta.

Play

5. Where do they live? Draw them.¿Dónde viven los animales? Dibújalos.

Think

6. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

What’s the meaning of cave?__________________________________What’s the meaning of bear?__________________________________What’s the meaning of fish?___________________________________

What’s the meaning of nest?___________________________________What’s the meaning of bird?___________________________________

 

 

Page 55: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 55/415

 

7. Write TRUE or FALSE.Escribe TRUE o FALSE sobre la línea.

a) A bird lives in a cave. __________________b) A dog lives in the sea. __________________c) A fish lives in the sea. __________________d) A bear lives in a cave. __________________

e) A person lives in a home. __________________

I live in a small town.

Read

Lesson 9 

 1. Read the dialogue, the teacher is presenting to a new student from Querétaro.

Lee el diálogo en donde el maestro está presentando a un nuevo alumno queviene de Querétaro.

Teacher: Good morning boys and girls. This is Armando, he is your newclassmate.

Students: Welcome Armando.Jorge: What’s your last name?

 Armando: Ortega.Mariana: How old are you?

 Armando: I’m twelve.Susana: Who do you live with?

 Armando: I live with my grandmother and grandfather.Lucía: Tell us about Querétaro.

 Armando: Well, it is a small, historic, clean and quiet city. People are very kind.

Page 56: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 56/415

 

Think

2. Circle the word that corresponds to the images.

Encierra la palabra que corresponda con las imágenes.

cold

big small modern historic clean dirty

Speak3. Interview a classmate about the place where she or he lives.

Realiza una entrevista a tu compañero (a) sobre el lugar donde vive.

You: Where do you live?

Classmate: I live in ______________________________

You: Tell me about it.

Classmate:  __________________________________________________________

 __________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________

hot

Page 57: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 57/415

 

Write

4. Describe the place where you live and draw it.Describe cómo es el lugar donde vives y dibújalo.

 _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

 _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

 _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

 _________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Read1. Read the biography of David.

Lee la biografía de David.

Lesson 10 

David Roberts was born inLeytonstone, London on May 2,

1975. He is a soccer player and themost famous sports personality in theworld.He is married to Victoria Gordon andthey have three sons. They live inLos Angeles.

David is a soccer player.

Page 58: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 58/415

 

2. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

 _______ What’s his name? a) He lives in Los Angeles. _______ What’s his last name? b) soccer. _______ What does he do? c) David. _______ How old is he? d) He is a soccer player.

 _______ Where does he live? e) It is on may 2. _______ Which is his favorite sport? f) Roberts. _______ When is his birthday? g) He is thirty-two years old.

Think

3. Read and underline the correct word.Lee la definición y subraya la palabra adecuada.

1. This word refers to a place.a) what b) where c) when

2. This word refers to a date.a) when b) which d) how

3. This word means “cuál”.a) when b) where d) which

Read Write

4. Read the ID card.Lee la identificación de Martha.

Personal IDName: MarthaLast name: RicoAge: 23Occupation: SecretaryAddress: 17 Amarilla Street

City: BogotáPhone: 3778203657

Page 59: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 59/415

 

5. Complete the text with Martha’s information.Completa el texto usando la información de Martha .

Martha Rico is a ____________. She’s ________________________ years old.She lives in __________________. Her address is__________________________.Her phone number is _____________________________.

Read Write

6. Read the information and complete the ID card.Lee la información y completa la credencial.

Read

Strongman is a superhero. He was born on the alienPlanet Kryptonia. He was rocketed to Earth before theplanet’s destruction. His name is Charles Ment. He worksas a reporter for the newspaper “The Daily Moon”.Strongman is faster than speeding bullet, more powerful

than locomotive and able to leap tall buildings in a singlebound.

Ivan Pavlovski is apoliceman. He lives inMoscow. He is thirty yearsold and his address is 16Stalin Road. His telephonenumber is 435-4008-23.

Personal ID

Name: ____________________________

Last name: ________________________

Age: _____________________________

Address: __________________________

Cit :

 7. Read the biography about Strongman.

Lee la biografía sobre Strongman.

Page 60: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 60/415

 

Write

8. Write a text similar to the Strongman’s, about a person you admire.

Escribe un texto similar al de Strongman sobre una persona que admires. ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________

Lesson 11 

 At the archaeological site.

Read 1. The students are in an archaeological site. Read the dialogues, and then writethe number on the lines according to the country the tourist is.

Los alumnos están de visita en una zona arqueológica. Lee los diálogos yescribe el número junto a la bandera de acuerdo con el país del turista.

Page 61: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 61/415

 

1)Juan: Good morning. What’s your name? _______Scott: I’m Scott Johnson. And you?Juan: I’m Juan. Nice to meet you.

Where are you from?Scott: I’m from England, I’m English.

Juan: Do you like Teotihuacán?Scott: Yes, it is wonderful.

 _______

3)Mariana: Hi. My name’s Mariana.

What’s your name?Taoshi: Hi. I’m Taoshi. What’s your name? ________Mariana: I’m Mariana.Taoshi: Nice to meet you.Mariana: Where are you from?Taoshi: I’m from China. I’m Chinese.

Think 

2. Answer the question.Contesta la pregunta.

Where are you from? means: ___________________________________________Write the three countries in the dialogue: __________________________________Write the three nationalities in the dialogue: ________________________________

 2)Susana: Hello.

What’s your name?Nicole: Hi. I’m Nicole. And you?Susana: I’m Susana.

Where are you from?Nicole: I’m from France, I’m French.Susana: What’s your opinion about Teotihuacán?Nicole: It is a beautiful place.

Page 62: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 62/415

 

Write

3. Locate on the map the countries in the box.Localiza en el mapa los países del rectángulo.

 

 japanese

Japan/Japanese England/EnglishPortugal/Portuguese Egypt/Egyptian

Russia/Russian France/French Greecce/GreekPeru/Peruvian Mexico /Mexican Thailand/Thai

Page 63: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 63/415

 

Write

4. With the information in the map complete the sentences.Con la información del mapa completa las oraciones.

a) Nicole is from France. She’s French. b) Scout is from ______________. He’s ____________________.c) Ivan is from _______________. He’s Russian.d) Greco is from Greek. He’s _____________________________.e) Taoshi is from ______________. He’s ___________________.f) Alisa is from ________________. She’s _________________.g) Sabdy is from ________________. She’s ________________.h) Mario is from Peru. He’s ______________________________.i) Juan is from __________________. He’s Mexican. 

 j) Paula is from Portugal. She’s __________________________.

5. Complete the table with information below.Completa el cuadro con la información anterior.

Country NationalityFrance French

6. Imagine you are from other country. Invent a name an write about yourself.Imagina que eres de otro país. Inventa un nombre y escribe sobre ti.

 ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________

Page 64: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 64/415

 

Where are you from?

Read1. Read the information about Jennifer, Ramiro and Nora.

Lee la información de Jennifer, Ramiro y Nora.

My name is Jennifer Robins, I’m from Toronto, Canada. I’mCanadian. I´m 12 years old. My birthday is on November 20th. Myfather is an actor. He is now working in Broadway.

His name is Ramiro Paredes. He’s from France. He’s French. He’s 13years old. His birthday is on September 1st. His sister is 3 years old.Her name is Lisa.

She is Nora Stevens. Nora’s from Texas. She’s American. She’s 11years old. Her birthday is on July 25th. Her mother’s from Guatemala.She´s Guatemalan.

2. Complete the information.Completa la información.

Ramiro’s from ____________________.He’s _______________________.He’s __________ years old.His birthday is on _________________.

Nora’s from ______________________.She’s ______________________.She’s ______________________ years old.Her mother’s from ____________________.

Jennifer’s from ______________________. ___________ Canadian.She´s ___________ years old.

 ________________________ November 20th.

Lesson 12

Page 65: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 65/415

 

Think

3. Answer the questions.

Contesta las preguntas.

We use ________ to say the country or the place of origin.a) fromb) for

Write4. Complete the chart using the words in the box.

Completa la tabla usando las palabras del cuadro.

Country NationalityBrazilCanadaChinaColombiaEnglandFranceGermany

GreeceItalyJapanPolandPortugalPeruSpainRussia

Chinese

Italian

German

French

Russian

Peruvian

Brazilian

Portuguese

Colombian

Canadian

Polish

English

Spanish

Greek

Japanese

Page 66: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 66/415

 

Think

5. Classify the nationalities according to their endings using the words of the box.

Clasifica las nacionalidades según sus terminaciones utilizando las palabras delcuadro anterior.

-n-an-ian

-ish -ese other

Italian English Chinese Greek

Are you from Brazil?

Read

1. Read the next dialogue.Lee el siguiente diálogo.

Paulo Da Silva: Hi. Are you a new student?

Carlos: Yes, I am. My name is Carlos Gómez.What´s your name?

Paulo Da Silva: My name is Paulo Da Silva.

Carlos: Your accent is different.Are you from Portugal?

Paulo Da Silva: No, I’m from Brazil. I’m Brazilian.I speak Portuguese.Are you Mexican?

Lesson 13

Page 67: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 67/415

 

Carlos: Yes, I´m Mexican.Are you from Río de Janeiro?

Paulo: No, I’m from Brazilia.

Carlos: Paulo, nice too meet you.

Paulo: Nice to meet you too. See you later!

Carlos: Good bye!

2. Answer the next questions.Contesta las siguientes preguntas.

Is Carlos a new student?

Is Correia the last name of Paulo?

Is Paulo from Brazilia?

Think

 

3. Answer the questions, according to your answers in 2.Contesta las preguntas.

What´s the structure of these questions?

How do you give an affirmative answer?

How do you give a negative answer?

Page 68: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 68/415

 

Read

4. Read the text.Lee el texto.

Roger Waters is 14 years old. He’s from Manchester, England. His parents are fromBelgium, they all live in Warsaw, Poland. He is a secondary student at Poland JuniorHigh. His birthday is on February 14th.

Write

5. Complete the information.Completa la información.

 __________________________________________ ? Roger.

 _________________________________________ ? No, his last name is Waters.

 _______________________________________? From Manchester, England. 

 _  ___________________________________________ ? In Warsaw, Poland.

 ____________________________________________ ? Yes, he is.

 ________________________________________ ? No, his birthday is onFebruary 14th.

Page 69: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 69/415

 

A creature from the space.

Read

1. This is a creature from the space. Read her biography.Esta criatura es del espacio. Lee la siguiente biografía.

Think

2. Complete the table with the missing words. Use the information in the text.Completa el cuadro con las palabras que faltan. Usa la información del texto.

Name Age Country Nationality Language Address

3. Draw a creature. Use the questions as a guide.Dibuja una criatura. Usa las preguntas como guía.

o  What’s the name of the creature?o  Where is it from?o  How old is the creature?o  What’s its nationality and language?o  What’s its address?o  What’s is its phone number?

Lesson 14

She is Zianya. She is a nurse in hercountry. She is from Zianyaland. Sheis 165 years old. Her nationality isZianyashian and her language is

Zianyish. Her address is 39 Blue Starin the Milky way. Her phone numberis 2873-28892-000.

Page 70: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 70/415

 

Answers to the questions.Respuestas a las preguntas.

 ______________________________________

 ______________________________________

 ______________________________________

 ______________________________________

 ______________________________________

 ______________________________________

 ______________________________________

 ______________________________________

 ______________________________________

Write about your creature.Escribe acerca de la criatura.

Text ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________ 

 ___________________________________________________________________

Think 

4. Show your creature to your classmates and read your text. Listen to the otherstories.

Muestra tu criatura a tus compañeros y lee tu texto. Escucha las otras historias.

Draw your creature hereDibuja aquí a tu criatura

Page 71: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 71/415

 

Nationality  means nacionalidad

Read

1. Read the text and underline the words you can understand with out a dictionary.Lee el texto y subraya las palabras que puedes entender sin usar un diccionario.

2. Write the words you underlined in the text.

Escribe las palabras que subrayaste en el texto.

 __Nationality,________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ 

Lesson 15

Homework.

Taoshi Okito is from Japan, his nationality isJapanese. He is thirty five years old. He is a

doctor and he works at the most importanthospitals in his country. He practices basketballand tennis. He is in Mexico city for vacation;he visited Chapultepec park, the Zocalo,the Fine Arts Palace and the National AnthropologyMuseum. I think Taoshi is a very intelligent andinteresting person.

These words are named “cognates”. A cognate is a word that is similarin English and Spanish and you can understand it easy.

Estas palabras se llaman cognados. Un cognado es una palabra que en

la escritura y el significado es similar o igual al español y las puedesentender fácilmente.

Page 72: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 72/415

 

Think

3. Write the meaning in Spanish of the words.

Escribe el significado en español de las siguientes palabras.

a) nationality ___________________b) doctor ___________________c) important ___________________d) hospital ___________________e) vacation ___________________f) museum ___________________g) intelligent ___________________

Write

4. Read the text and answer the questions.Lee el texto y contesta las preguntas.

Koko is a gorilla. He’s from Africa andhe lives in a zoo with other animals.His best friends are the elephants,the hippopotamus, the chimpanzee

and the crocodile. His favorite foodare bananas and chocolates. You canvisit him at the zoo and takephotographs. He will be happy to seeyou. He is very intelligent.

a) Where is Koko from? ____________________________________________

b) Where does he live? ____________________________________________

c) Who are his friends? ____________________________________________

d) Write the cognates: ____________________________________________

e) Write in Spanish what you understand from the text ___________________

Page 73: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 73/415

 

What about your brother or sister?

Read1. Read the text.

Lee el siguiente texto.

2. Look at the words in bold. Who do they refer to? Circle the correct option.Observa las palabras en negritas. ¿A quién se refieren? Encierra la opción

adecuada .

1. En la primer línea, he se refiere a:a) Mario b) The father c) The mother

2. En la segunda línea, they se refiere a:a) Mario and his father. b) Mother and father. c) Mario and his brothers

3. En la segunda línea, she se refiere a:a) The mother b) Mario c) The sister

4. En la tercer línea, he se refiere a:a) The father b) The teacher c) The mother

Think

3. Underline the best option.Subraya la mejor opción.

A) These are personal pronouns:a) I, you, he, she, it, they, we b) in, on, under, next to.

Lesson 16

 Mario is a student in first grade at secondary school. He plays soccer with hisbrothers. They  play on Sundays in the park. His mother carries the lunch.  She prepares some sandwiches and carries sodas for drink. His father goes with themtoo. He is the coach of the team.

Page 74: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 74/415

 

B) These are possessive adjectives:a) one, two, three, four, five, six b) My, your, his, her, its, their, our

Play4. Find and circle eight personal pronouns in the letters.

Encuentra y encierra los 8 pronombres escondidos en la sopa de letras.

A I T W M S H E

F T H E Y M E H

G S E B O U R I

C J M X U S D M

T H E M R H I S

Write

5. Interview to a classmate. Then, answer the questions.Entrevista a uno de sus compañeros y contesta las siguientes preguntas.

What is your name? ____________________________________

What is your last name? ____________________________________

Where are you from? ____________________________________

When is your birthday? ____________________________________

What is your favorite sport? ____________________________________

6. With the information about your classmate write a text like Mario’s.Con la información de tu compañero escribe un texto, usa el de Mario como

ejemplo.

 ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________  ___________________________________________________________________

Page 75: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 75/415

 

Send me an e-mail.

Read

1. Read the text.Lee el texto.

Yoko wants to contact a friend in England and she decided to send him an e-mail:

From: Yoko TamaguchiTo: Stephen MorrisseySubject: Hi, Stephen!

Dear Stephen:

Hi! My name is Yoko Tamaguchi I´m from Japan, I´m fourteen years old, I´m astudent. I live in Kyoto. My father is a doctor, his name is Kato Tamaguchi, he´s veryintelligent. My mother is a nurse, her name Akane Tendo, she is from Tokyo, she´svery careful with her patients. They work together at the same Hospital. I have alittle brother named Daero, he´s seven years old. I will be very glad if you phone me,my telephone number is: 26 26 11 44 or send me an e-mail my adress is:[email protected].

Sincerely,YOKO TAMAGUCHI

Lesson 17

 2. Order the questions and answer them.

Ordena las preguntas y contéstalas tomando en cuenta la información de Yoko.

e.g. How old is Yoko? She is fourteen years old.

is/ Yoko’s/ last/ name /What/? _______________________________________

she/ does/do / What? _______________________________________

his/ What´s/ occupation/ father’s?

  _______________________________________are/ Where/ from/ they?

 _______________________________________

Page 76: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 76/415

 

 _______________________________________

3. Interview 3 of your classmates and complete the information.Entrevista a 3 de tus compañeros (as) y completa la información

1)

What´s your name? My name is ______________________How __________? I´m ____________ years oldWhere´re you from? I´m from _________________________What´s your ________________? My telephone number is ____________

2)What´s _____________? His name is ______________________How old are you? He’s ____________ years oldWhere´re you from? He’s from ________________________What´s your telephone number? His _____________ is ______________

3)

 _______ your name? Her name is ______________________How old _________? She’s ____________ years __________ _________ you from? I´m from ___________________ __________ telephone number? Her telephone _________ is _________

Write

4. Reply Yoko´s e-mail, including all your personal information.

Contesta el e-mail de Yoko incluyendo tus datos personales.  

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 Kato/ Who/ Tamaguchi/ is?

Page 77: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 77/415

 

1. Order the dialogue and write the corresponding numbers (1,2,3, or 4)Ordena el diálogo y escribe el número que corresponda.

( ) Nice to meet you too.( ) Hello, Mario. I am Lucy.( ) Nice to meet you.( 1 ) Hi, My name is Mario.

The teacher is going to dictate to you, listen to 5 different names and then spell themto the class, then write the names in the table.El profesor te va a dictar, escucha cinco nombres diferentes y deletréalos para laclase, posteriormente escríbelos en la tabla.

e.g. Pedro Xtabay P-E-D-R-O X- T-A-B-A-Y PedroXtabay

12345

2. Match the columns.

Relaciona las columnas.

1) May I go to the bathroom?

2) Sit down!

3) Open your books.

4) Close the window.

Lesson 18

 

Review 

Page 78: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 78/415

 

3. Find and circle the twelve months of the year.Encuentra y encierra los 12 meses del año.

N X I P H F A P R I L

O C T O B E R B J M D

V L M V J B Q X M A E

E W U D Z R C T A R C

M K J A N U A R Y C E

B Z R U H A K B C H M

E T P G C R P J S L B

R H J U L Y G U T Z E

Y D O S W D X N G H R

S E P T E M B E R Y X

4. Answer the puzzle in English.Responde en inglés el crucigrama.

Horizontales

1. El nombre de este día se parece al cuarto planeta del Sistema Solar.2. Es el día en que toda la familia se reúne.3. Es el primer día de la semana.4. Su nombre se parece a un planeta que tiene anillos.

Page 79: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 79/415

 

Verticales

5. Es el día que empieza con “w” y termina con “y”.6. Último día de clases.7. Es el día que tiene 6 letras en su escritura y empieza con “j” en español.

Twenty four twoThirteenth fiftySecond oneSixty nine Sixty ninthFirst thirty threeFiftieth Twenty fourthThirty third thirteen

2

4

6

 5. Match the ordinal and cardinal numbers. Follow the example.

Relaciona los números ordinales y  cardinales. Fíjate en el ejemplo.

Page 80: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 80/415

 

6. With the help of a dictionary find the meaning of the next words. Write themeaning on the line.

Con la ayuda del diccionario busca la traducción en español de las siguientespalabras. Escribe el significado sobre la línea.

1) scissors___________________2) schoolbag: ________________

3) cucumber: ________________4) Classmate: ________________

7. Answer the questions about yourself.Contesta las preguntas sobre ti mismo.

a) What’s your name? _________________________________________________b) What’s your last name?______________________________________________c) How old are you? __________________________________________________d) What’s your address? _______________________________________________e) Where are you from? _______________________________________________f) Where do you live? _________________________________________________

8. Write the word in the line. Follow the example.Escribe la palabra sobre la línea. Fíjate en el ejemplo.

Laura: This is my friend Mariana.Mariana: Where is ___________ from?Laura: _________’s from Brazil.Mariana: And this picture?Laura: _________ name is Rosario.

 _________’s from Spain.

Mariana: What’s _________ last name?Laura: Her  __ last name is Castillo.

9. Choose the answer.Escoge la respuesta.

1) Hi. I ( ‘m/ ‘s ) Dave.2) Hello. We ( ‘s / ‘re ) Mary and Hellen.3) She ( ‘re / ‘s ) a nurse.4) Dianna’s ( from / on ) Argentina

5) John’s birthday is ( on / an ) November 11th

.

her her her she she she

Page 81: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 81/415

 

10. Write the occupation under the picture. Use a or an and the words in the box.Follow the example.

Escribe la ocupación debajo de cada dibujo. Usa a  o an y las palabras en elcuadro. Fíjate en el ejemplo.

11. Read the sentences and match them with the pictures. Follow the example.Lee las oraciones y relaciónalas con los dibujos. Fíjate en el ejemplo.

1.( b  ) 2.( ) 3.( ) 4.( ) 5.( )

an astronaut__

 

doctor

mechanic

nurse

plumber

teacher

architect

astronaut

Page 82: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 82/415

 

a) Mr. Fernando García is Mexican. He is a carpenter and he is thirty three yearsold.b) Miss. Sally Laurence is an English teacher. She is from England. She’s thirtyyears old.c) Mrs. Sumiko Tokana is a Japanese actress. She’s forty years old.d) Mr. Paul Dupont is a doctor. He’s from France. He’s forty four years old.e) Mr. Marcio Correia is a mechanic. He’s from Brazil. He’s twenty eight years old.

12. Choose the correct word and write it on the line.Elige la respuesta correcta y escríbela sobre la línea.

1. Mario is from Brazil. He is __________________________.a) Brazilian b) French

2. Ivan is from Russia. He is __________________________.a) Rustic b) Russian

3. Nicole is from France. She is ________________________.

a) French b) Francois

4. Robert is from England. He is ________________________.a) English b) Englishman

5. Yoko is from Japan. She is ___________________________.a) Chinese b) Japanese

13. Write the country and nationality under the flag. Use the words in the box.Escribe el país y la nacionalidad debajo de cada bandera. Usa las palabras del

cuadro.

1._____________ 2.______________ 3.______________

Belgium England Mexico China France Poland

Belgian English Mexican Chinese French Polish

Page 83: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 83/415

 

4._____________ 5._______________ 6._____________

1. Page 7.Página .

( 4 ) Nice to meet you too.( 2 ) Hello, Mario. I am Lucy.( 3 ) Nice to meet you.

( 1) Hi, My name is Mario.

2. Page .Página .

1) May I go to the bathroom?

2) Sit down!

3) Open your books.

4) Close the window.

Answers/Respuestas

77 7 

777 7 

Page 84: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 84/415

 

3. Page 8.Página .

4. Page .Página .

N X I P H F A P R I L

O C T O B E R B J M D

V L M V J B Q X M A E

E W U D Z R C T A R C

M K J A N U A R Y C E

B Z R U H A K B C H M

E T P G C R P J S L B

R H J U L Y G U T Z E

Y D O S W D X N G H R

S E P T E M B E R Y X

 

           

   

        

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

     

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

78 7 

79

7 9 

Page 85: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 85/415

 

5. Page .Página .Match the ordinal and numbers. Follow the example.Relaciona los números ordinales y  cardinales . Fíjate en el ejemplo.

Twenty four twoThirteenth fiftySecond one

Sixty nine Sixty ninthFirst thirty threeFiftieth Twenty fourthThirty third thirteen

6. Page 0.Página .

Scissors: it is an item to cut.Schoolbag: it is a bag to carry school items.Cucumber: the long fleshy many-seeded fruit of a vine is agarden vegetable

Classmate: a member of the same class (as in college)Unit 17.a) What’s your name? My name is ……..b) What’s your last name? My last name is ………………c) How old are you? I’m ……………… years oldd) What’s your address? My address is # + Streete) Where are you from? I’m from ………………….f) Where do you live? I live in …………………..

8. PagePágina

Laura: This is my friend Mariana.Mariana: Where is she from?Laura: She’s from Brazil.Mariana: And this picture?Laura: Her name is Rosario.

She’s from Spain.Mariana: What’s her last name?Laura: Her  __ last name is Castillo.

9. PagePágina

1) Hi. I ( ‘m/ ‘s ) Dave.2) Hello. We ( ‘s / ‘re ) Mary and Hellen.3) She ( ‘re / ‘s ) a nurse.4) Dianna’s ( from / on ) Argentina5) John’s birthday is ( on / an ) November 11th.

79

7 9 

80 8 

08

0 8 

08

0 8 

Page 86: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 86/415

 

11. PagePágina

1.( b  ) 2.( d ) 3.( a ) 4.( e ) 5.( c )

12. Page 2Página

1. a) Brazilian2. b) Russian3. a) French4. a) English5. b) Japanese

13. PagePágina

1) Mexico/ Mexican2) Belgic/ Belgian3) China/ Chinese

4) Poland/ Polish5) England/ English6) France/ French

 

doctormechanic

nurseplumberteacherarchitectastronaut

an astronaut__ an architect

a mechanic a nurse a plumber a teacher

10. Page 1.8

  Página .18 

1818

82 8 

282 8 

a teacher

Page 87: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 87/415

 

Materiales de apoyo 

Temas Material sugeridoRecuerda que puedesconsultar estas páginaselectrónicas a lo largo de todala unidad.

• www.bbc.co.uk/teens• www.afterschool.gob/kidsnteens2.html.• Programa sepAingles. Programa: ¡Hello!

Para la lección 1 de la unidad introductoria.

Bibliografía

Beare, N., Links 2 Teacher´s Guide, México, Macmillan, 2005.

Celorio, G., Smash! 2, Teacher´s Resource Book,  México, Richmond

Publishing, 1997.

Domínguez, E. et al ., Connections one. Student´s Book,  México, Nuevo

México, 2006.

Emilsson, E. et al ., Dialogues. English 1, México, Fondo de Cultura

Económica, 2002.Haines, P. et al ., Crossroads. English 1. México, Oxford University Press,

2006.

Kirn, E. et al ., A Communicative Grammar, México, McGraw-Hill,1996.

Programas de Estudio. Educación básica. Secundaria. Lengua Extranjera

Inglés, México, SEP, 2006.

Salazar, J., English 1. México, Santillana, 2006.

Van der Werff, J., New Passport Student´s Book,  México, Richmond

Publishing, 2006.

Page 88: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 88/415

Page 89: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 89/415

Unit 2Actions in progress/Acciones en progreso

INGLÉS  I

Page 90: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 90/415

Page 91: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 91/415

 

Unit  2

 

Actions in progress/Acciones en progreso

El propósito de esta unidad es capacitar a los estudiantes para que den yobtengan información sobre posesiones y describan acciones que están enprogreso, es decir, en el momento en el que se está hablando.

Purpose/Propósito  

Topics / Temas  

 Lesson 1 Sending an e-mailLesson 2 This is Samuel’s sweaterLesson 3 Whose are these shorts?Lesson 4 That is my favorite jacketLesson 5 These blue jeans are comfortableLesson 6 Are these your sunglasses?Lesson 7 Mini CheckLesson 8 Looking for ArturoLesson 9 Speaking on the phoneLesson 10 Getting ready to the party

Lesson 11 Enjoying a partyLesson 12 What’s happening at the party?Lesson 13 A day in AcapulcoLesson 14 MiniLesson 15 Project: A class magazine. Part oneLesson 16 Project: A class magazine. Part twoLesson 17 Project: A class magazine. Part threeLesson 18 Project: A class magazine. Part fourLesson 19 Project: A class magazine. Part fiveLesson 20 Project: A class magazine. Part sixLesson 21 Project: A class magazine. Part seven

Lesson 22 ReviewLesson 23 ReviewLesson 24 Review24 sessions, 8 weeks/ 24 sesiones, 8 semanas 

Check

Page 92: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 92/415

 

Sending an e-mail

Read

1. Answer the question about the text.Responde la pregunta acerca del texto.

What is this text?a) a letter b) a dialogue c) an e-mail

2. Look at the picture and read the text.Observa la imagen y lee el texto.

          From: [email protected]: [email protected]: Greetings from Mexico

Dear Robert,

I’m sending you a photograph of me with my family. Here I’m wearing all in red. Red is my favorite color, that’s why my jacket is red, my pants are red and even my shoes are red.The boy next to me is my  little brother. His name is Arturo. In the picture, he is wearing his “charro” suit, because the photo is from Mexican Independence day.Behind me and my brother are my parents. They are also wearing typical clothes. They only

wear their typical clothes to celebrate Independence Day. I think their clothes are very nice,especially my mother’s black skirt covered with bright decoration. Send me an e-mail soon.The girls that are sitting in front are my sisters Monica and Laura.

Regards,Mauricio

Lesson 1

Page 93: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 93/415

 

3. Answer the questions according to the e-mail.Responde las preguntas de acuerdo con el correo electrónico.

1. What’s Mauricio describing?A) an e-mailB) a Picture

2. What’s Mauricio’s favorite color?A) blueB) red

3. What are Mauricio’s parents wearing?A) typical clothesB) sport clothes

Think Write

4. Look at the bold words and answer the following questions. Underline thecorrect answer.

Observa las palabras en negritas   y contesta las siguientes preguntas.Subraya la respuesta que corresponda.

1. In the first paragraph, my refers to:•  Mauricio•  Arturo

2. In the second paragraph, his refers to:•  “charro” suit•  Arturo

3. In the last paragraph their refers to:•  customs•  Independence Day

4. Words my, his, their are possessive adjectives, and they areused to show:

•  possession•  description

Page 94: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 94/415

 

5. Complete the chart with the words in the box.Completa la tabla.

IYouHeShe

ItWeYouThey Their

Play 

6. Read the next words and write on the lines the name of the color thatcorresponds.

Lee las siguientes palabras y escribe en las líneas el nombre del color quecorresponde.

    

     

Her My His YourYour Our

Page 95: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 95/415

 

Write

7. Look at the pictures. Complete the information. Use possessive adjectives(my, your, her …) and colors (blue, black, white…).

Observa las imágenes. Completa la información. Usa los adjetivosposesivos (my, your, her …) y los colores (blue, black, white…).

Example: My skirt is blue.

 ___________ book is _____________.

 ___________ schoolbag is _____________.

 ____________ house is ______________.

 ____________ uniforms are _______________.

Page 96: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 96/415

 

This is Samuel’s sweater

Read 

1. Answer the question about the text.Responde la pregunta acerca del texto.

What is this text?a) a chart b) an e-mail c) a dialogue

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

Mauricio: Mom, tell Monica this is not her sweater.Mom: Hey Monica, Mauricio is right,this is not your sweater, but Mauricio,this is not yours either.This is Laura’s sweater, right Laura?

Laura: No, mom. It isn’t mine.Mauricio: No, mom. Laura’s sweater is blue and this is

green.This is my friend’s.Mom: What friend?Monica: It’s Samuel’s.Mom: Why do you have Samuel’s sweater?

Monica: Because we are good friends.Mom: Ok.

3. Answer the questions about the dialogue.Contesta las preguntas acerca del diálogo.

1) Why are Monica and Mauricio discussing? _____________________________________________________________2) What color is Laura’s sweater?

 _____________________________________________________________3) Who is the owner of the sweater?

 _____________________________________________________________

Lesson 2

Page 97: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 97/415

 

Think

4. Go back to the dialogue. Look at the red words. Choose the correctanswer

Observa las palabras en rojo del diálogo.  Elige la respuesta quecorresponda.

What does (‘s) mean?

a) pluralb) possessionc) contraction of is  

In the dialogue Monica says: It’s Samuel’s. Write on the line what are the (´)referring to:It’s  refers to_____________________________________Samuel’s  refers to ________________________________

Write

5. Complete the information according to the images.Completa la información de acuerdo con las imágenes.

Example: Whose is this sweater?This is Laura’s sweater.

1) Whose is this jacket?

This is ______________ ________________.

2) Whose is this t-shirt?

This is ______________ ________________.

3) Whose is these shoes?

These are______________ _______________.

Laura

Mario

Bob

Jenny

Page 98: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 98/415

 

4) Whose is this dress?

This is ______________ ________________.

5) Whose are these pants?

These are______________ ________________.

6. Write five sentences about the clothes your classmates and teacher arewearing.

Escribe cinco enunciados sobre las prendas que tus compañeros ymaestro están usando.

Example: Norma’s blouse is pink.

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

Speak

7. Look at the things you have on your desk. Ask your partners whose isthis/that? Answer the questions to your partners. 

Observa los objetos de tu escritorio. Pregunta a tus compañeros whose is

this/that? Responde las preguntas a tus compañeros.

Carol

Maria

Page 99: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 99/415

 

Whose are these shorts?

Read 

1. Answer the question about the dialogue.Responde las preguntas acerca del diálogo.

2. Read the dialogue.

Lee el diálogo.

Mauricio’s family is on vacations. They areleaving soon and they are packing to go.

Laura: Whose are these shorts Monica?Monica: They are Mauricio’s.Laura: Really? Aren’t Mauricio’s white?Monica: Yes, they are white, but they look

black because are very dirty.Laura: Wow!, that is a color change!

Monica and Laura: Ha ha ha ha...Monica: Are you taking your sun glasses?Laura: No. Look, they are broken.Monica: Ops! that’s a shame.

Lesson 3

 Where is Mauricio’s family?a) camping b) on the beach c) at school

Page 100: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 100/415

 

Think

3. Answer the next questions.Responde las siguientes preguntas.

•  Is there a plural form for shorts?a) yes b) no

•  Is there a plural form for sun  glasses ?a) yes b) no

How do you form plural nouns? _____________________________________________________________

Words like ___________are always plural.a) cap, coatb) jeans, shorts, pants, etc.

Words like ___________ are plural because they become in pairs.a) jeans, shorts, pants, etc.b) socks, shoes, gloves, etc.

Page 101: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 101/415

 

4. Look at the pictures and match the columns.Observa las imágenes y relaciona las columnas.

gloves

tennis shoes

pants

 jeans

glasses

socks

shorts

shoes

Page 102: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 102/415

 

 

Write

5. Write the singular or plural forms of the clothes.

Escribe la forma singular o plural de las siguientes prendas. 

Singular Plural

shoe shoesdressespants

coat jackets

blousecaps

Speak

6. Work in pairs. Ask your partner what he is wearing. Circle the clotheshe/she is wearing.

Trabaja en parejas. Pregunta a tu compañero cómo está vestido. Circulala prenda que porta.

Write

7. Write on the lines the description of clothes your partner and you arewearing.

Escribe sobre las líneas la descripción de tu ropa y la de tu compañero.

Page 103: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 103/415

 

He/ She is wearing _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________

I’m wearing ___________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________

That is my favorite jacket

Read 1. Order the letters to form a word. Write them on the line.

Ordena las letras para formar una palabra. Escríbelas sobre la línea.

t/ r/ i/ k/ s e/ a/ j/ s/ n c/ k/ t/ e/ a/ j ____________ ______________ _______________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Erika: Wow! That jacket is so cool!

Laura: Oh, thanks. This is my favorite one.My father bought it for me in the USAErika: And look at that jeans. It is fabulous!Laura: Thank you.

This isn’t my favorite one,but it is comfortable.

3. Answer the questions about the dialogue.Responde las preguntas acerca del diálogo.

1) What is Laura’s favorite cloth?

 __________________________________2) Where did Laura’s father buy her jacket? ___________________________________3) Why does Laura like her skirt?

 ___________________________________

Lesson 4

Page 104: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 104/415

 

Think

4. Answer the questions.Responde las preguntas.

In line 1, that refers to….a) the jacketb) Erika 

In line 6, this  refers to ….a) the jacketb) the skirt

This/that  are used with…..a) singular nounsb) plural nouns

This is used to show….a) proximityb) distance

Write

5. Write on the line this/that . Look at the location of hand.Escribe sobre la línea this/that . Tomando en cuenta el señalamiento de la

mano.

 _________

 ___________  

 __________

 ___________  

Page 105: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 105/415

 

6. Complete the information. Use this/that. Completa la información.Usa this/that.

I like ___________ jacket.

 ___________ is hersweater.

 ___________ is mywatch.

Look at ___________skirt.

Page 106: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 106/415

 

Write Speak

7. Work in pairs. Write a dialogue similar to two. Practice saying the dialogue.Trabaja en parejas. Escribe un diálogo similar al punto dos. Practica

diciendo en voz alta el diálogo. _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

These blue jeans are comfortable

Read 

1. Complete the chart. Use the dialogue.Completa la tabla. Usa el diálogo.

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Laura: Hurry up Monica! It is getting late for thecinema. These tickets for “Mystic Romance”are for the 6 p.m. show and it is 5:40 now.

Monica: I know, I know. I’m changing my clothesas fast as I can.

Laura: Well, you aren’t doing your best!Monica: Please, pass me those jeans.Laura: Which ones?Monica: Those on the bed.Laura: The blue ones or the black ones?Monica: The blue ones, please.Laura: Here you are.Monica: Thanks my friend. I love these jeans.

Lesson 5

Killerman 5:45 p.m.Man on the moon 3:20 p.m.Mystic Romance

Page 107: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 107/415

 

Think

3. Choose the right answer.Escoge la respuesta que corresponda.

Those is used to show….a) proximityb) distance

Those is used with…a) plural nounsb) singular nouns

Write

4. Write on the line these/those . Look at the ,Escribe sobre la línea these/those. Toma en cuenta las flechas

,

 _______________ are Alejandra’s jeans.

 _______________ are your shorts.

 _______________ are Julio’s tennis shoes.

 _______________ are Teacher’s glasses.

 _______________ are his pants.

Page 108: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 108/415

 

Write

5. Look Greg’s picture. Write on the lines these/those .Observa la foto de Greg. Escribe sobre la línea these/those.

 _________ are a Greg’s family pictures. Look at this one. __________ girlswearing the _________ jeans and ___________ t-shirts are my sisters. Theirnames are Susan and Jenny they are twins. The one next to them is Memo,he is Susan’s boyfriend. ____________ are my grandparents.__________are my cousins Paco and Tino.

Speak Write

6. Bring a picture. Write a text similar to five. Share your description with yourclassmates.

Trae una foto. Escribe un texto similar al del punto cinco. Comparte tudescripción con tus compañeros.

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

Page 109: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 109/415

 

Are these your sunglasses?

Read

1. Complete the chart.Completa la tabla.

Singular (proximity) Plural (distance)this

those

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Roger: Hey! That pair of glasses is the teacher’s.Paul: Really? I’m not sure. I think those are Mauricio’s glasses.Roger: Well, let’s ask the teacher.

Paul: Teacher, are these Mauricio’s or yours?Teacher: No, they aren’t mine. I’m sure they are Mauricio’s, I saw him

wearing them.Roger: Ok, we will ask Mauricio.

Roger: Mauricio, are these your glasses?Mauricio: Oh, yes, they are mine. This is my lucky day. Thanks a lot.

Lesson 6

Page 110: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 110/415

 

3. Answer the questions.Responde las preguntas .

1) What are Paul and Roger talking about? ____________________________________________________2) Are they Teacher’s glasses?

 ____________________________________________________3) Are they Mauricio’s?

 ____________________________________________________

Think

4. Look at the dialogue. Answer the questions.Observa el diálogo. Responde las preguntas.

To ask about someone’s possessions we say ________.

a) Is this your jacket?b) This is your jacket?

Complete the chart.

Is this your jacket?No, these are Andrea’s jeans.

Are those your sneakers?Yes, that is my sweater.

Page 111: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 111/415

 

Write

5. Complete the information. Use this/that/these/those .Completa la información. Usa this/that/these/those.

Do you like ________sweater?

 _________ jeansare for you.

I like _________red cap.

Look at _________people wearingcustoms.

Page 112: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 112/415

 

6. Order the words to form the questions.Ordena las palabras para formar las preguntas .

Example: those/ your / are/ gloves/?Are those your gloves?

1) bag / Is / this / your/ ? / __________________________________________2) your / these / ? / books / Are /

 __________________________________________3) my / ? / Is / coat / that /

 __________________________________________4) those / his / Are / shoes?

 __________________________________________5) Mario’s / these / shorts / Are / ?

 __________________________________________

Speak 

7. Put some of your clothes in a bag. Take one by one out an ask: Is thisyour....? until you find the owner.

Pongan algunas de sus prendas en una bolsa. Vayan tomando una poruna y pregunten: Is this your...? hasta encontrar al dueño.

Example Is this your sweater Ana?Yes, it is mine. 

Clothe Owner

Page 113: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 113/415

 

Mini Check

Read 

1. What kind of text is it?¿Qué tipo de texto es?

a) letter b) post card c) e-mail

2. Read the text. Look at the picture.Lee el texto. Observa la imagen.

          From: [email protected] To: [email protected]: Greetings from Mexico

Dear Nigel:

I’m sending you a picture of my last weekend. In this picture I’m wearing my white shorts.Believe me, these shorts are white, but look black because they are very dirty. My sistersare in the picture too. Monica is wearing her sun glasses. Laura’s glasses are broken, so,Laura isn’t wearing glasses. She is wearing her red bathing suit. Those people at the backare my parents. They are buying sodas. Write me soon.

Regards,

Mauricio 

Lesson 7

Page 114: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 114/415

 

3. Answer the questions about the e-mail.Responde las preguntas acerca del correo electrónico.

1) Where are they in the picture? _______________________________________________________2) Why do Mauricio’s shorts turned black?

 _______________________________________________________3) Why Laura is not wearing her sunglasses?

 ________________________________________________________4) What are Mauricio’s parents doing?

 ________________________________________________________

Think

 

4. Find the information in text 1. Complete the chart.Encuentra la información en el texto 1. Completa la tabla.

PossessiveAdjectives

DemostrativePronouns

Colors Clothes ‘s to showpossession

Pluralnouns

my white

bathing

suit

sun

glasses

those

Page 115: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 115/415

 

5. Find the words in the box and circle them.Encuentra y encierra las palabras del cuadro.

6. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

Are these Pablo’s shorts? Yes, they are my pants.

Is this your favorite color? Yes, they are my glasses.

Are those your pants? Yes, that’s my favorite color.

Is that my skirt? No, these shorts are Rodrigo’s

Are these your glasses? No, this is Laura’s skirt.

R S G B I N B D O Y

Z E M L Q O H G M E

R T D A U I P L T L

B X V C A P J I G L

R L B K O M H K T O

O X O O F W X A C W

W B H U J N O C Z R

N V R G S C A R F V

Y D R J J E A N S Y

S K I R T P I N K N

red black white brown yellow pinkcap scarf jeans skirt blouse

coat

Page 116: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 116/415

 

7. Answer Mauricio’s e-mail.Responde el correo electrónico a Mauricio.

          From:To: [email protected] Subject:

Page 117: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 117/415

 

Looking for Arturo

Read

At the amusement parkEn un parque de diversiones.

1. What are they doing?¿Qué están haciendo?

a) looking for someone b) watching T.V.

2. Read the announcement.Lee el anuncio.

May I have your attention, please?We are looking for a boy. He’s 6 years old, his name is Arturo. He is Fiona’sbrother He is wearing yellow shorts, white T-shirt and a red cap. If you seehim, please go to the security people of the park. Security people arewearing navy blue pants, green shirts, white gloves and beige hats.Thanks for your attention.

Lesson 8

Page 118: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 118/415

 

3. Answer the questions about the announcement.Responde las preguntas acerca del anuncio.

1) Who is looking for a boy? ____________________________________________2) Where are they?

 ____________________________________________3) What do you have to do in case you see the boy?

 _____________________________________________

Think 

4. Look at the dialogue again. Choose the right answer.Elige la respuesta que corresponda.

To describe what somebody is wearing, we use:a) am/is/are wearing .b) am/is/are wears .

Why are they describing people clothes? _____________________________________________

Write

5. Look at the images. Describe the clothes the images are wearing. Write iton the lines.

Observa las imágenes y escribe sobre la línea la descripción de lasprendas que se están usando.

Page 119: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 119/415

 

1)

She is wearing_________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________

2)

He is wearing _________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

I am wearing __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________

Draw yourself. 

Page 120: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 120/415

 

Play

5. Place the chairs in a circle around the classroom. All the classmates willoccupy a place except one that will keep standing.

•  The one that is standing will have to say: “I’m a new neighbor, and I lovethe neighbors that are wearing...” and will complete the phrase saying aclothe or an object they have or wear in the moment, saying the color.

•  The persons that are wearing that clothe will have to change place, andthe one that is standing up will take a place on the chairs that are free,leaving someone standing up and he will repeat the instructions with othercharacteristics.

•  Coloquen las sillas formando un círculo alrededor del salón. Todos los

alumnos ocuparán un lugar excepto un integrante que permanecerá de pie.

•  El que esté de pie dirá la siguiente instrucción: “I´m a new neighbor, and IIove the neighbors that are wearing.....” completando la frase con algunaprenda u objeto que estén utilizando, dando características de color.

•  Las personas que cumplan con dichos requisitos deberán cambiar delugar, mientras que el que está de pie ocupará una de las sillas que quedenlibres, dejando a un integrante de pie, que repetirá la instrucción con otracaracterística.

Page 121: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 121/415

 

Speaking on the phone

Read 

1. What is Fiona doing?¿ Qué está haciendo Fiona?

2. Read the dialogue. Write on the line the number of the dialogue that refersto the image.

Lee el diálogo. Escribe sobre la línea el número del diálogo que

corresponda a la imagen.

1)Dad: Hello?Fiona: Hi, dad. What’s up?Dad: How are you doing?Fiona: Fine dad, everything is ok.

Are you working?2)Dad: Yes, I am. What’s Arturo doing?Fiona: He is watching T.V.

3)Dad: And your mom? What is she doing?Fiona: She is baking a cake and I’m studying.

Lesson 9

 a) writing a letter b) speaking on the phone

Page 122: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 122/415

 

3. Answer the questions.Responde las preguntas.

1) What is Arturo doing? _____________________________________________________2) What is Fiona´s father doing?

 _____________________________________________________3) What’s Fiona’s mother doing?

 _____________________________________________________

Think 

4. Look at the words in bold. Answer the questions.Observa las palabras en negritas . Responde las preguntas.

1) We use present continuous to express actions that ___________.a) are happening nowb) happened yesterday

2) How do you form present continuous?a) am/is/are + -ingb) am/is/are + -ed

Write

5. Look at the image. Complete the sentences with the words in the box.Observa la imagen. Completa los enunciados con las palabras del cuadro.

Page 123: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 123/415

 

My father is ____________ his red car. My mother is ___________breakfast. They are ___________   for the bus. Hurry up! The bus is

 ____________.I’m _____________  T.V. because I’m sick!

Play

6. The teacher previously will make a list of verbs: Jumping, sleeping,watching, shouting, dancing, sitting, and standing. Then he will give them to

five students. They will have to act the verb and the other students will haveto imitate what they are doing and every time they mention the verbeverybody will have to act it.

El profesor previamente elaborará un listado de verbos: brincando,durmiendo, viendo, gritando, bailando, sentado y parado. Posteriormente elmaestro repartirá al azar a cinco alumnos los verbos, éstos los actuarán paraque el grupo adivine la acción que están realizando y cada vez quemencionen el verbo todos lo actuarán.

watching coming waiting washing

Page 124: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 124/415

 

Getting ready to the party

Read 

1. Write on the line the color that corresponds.Escribe sobre la línea el color que corresponda.

yellow + blue = ________________white + ______________ = gray

 _____________ + yellow = orange

 ____________ + blue = _________________  

2. Read the conversation between Fiona and Maria.Lee la conversación entre Fiona y Maria.

Maria: Hello. Is Fiona speaking?Fiona: Yes.Maria: Hi. This is Maria speaking.Fiona: Oh. Hi, what’s up, Maria?Maria: I’m just getting ready for the party.

Are you ready?Fiona: Almost.Maria: Listen. I’m wearing yellow clothes.

What do you think, black shoes or white shoes?Fiona: Are you wearing pants?Maria: No. I’m wearing a dress.Fiona: Well, I think white shoes then.Maria: Ok. Thanks. What about you?

What are you wearing? Are you wearing yourgreen skirt?I love it!

Fiona: No, I’m not. I’m wearing jeans this time.Maria: Ops! It’s getting late. See you at the party.Fiona: Ok then. Bye bye.

Lesson 10

Page 125: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 125/415

 

Write Think 

Fiona is speaking with Arturo. T FMaria is wearing a yellow dress. T FFiona is wearing a green skirt. T F

4. Find the questions in the conversation. Complete the chart.Encuentra las preguntas en la conversación. Completa la tabla.

What + is/are/am + verb-ing +?

is/are/am + verb-ing + ?

5. Choose the right answer.Elige la respuesta que corresponda.

We use short answers (yes/ no, I am...) with____a) inverted questionsb) Wh- questions

 

3. Circle T if the sentence is TRUE and F if it’s FALSE.Encierra T si el enunciado es Verdadero y F si es falso.

Page 126: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 126/415

 

6. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

a) What’s she wearing? They are playing soccer.b) Is she watching T.V.? Yes, I am having dinner.c) Are you having dinner? No, she is sleeping.d) What are they doing? She’s wearing a black skirt.

Write

7. Write on the line the questions in order. Answer the questions. Ordena las palabras para formar las preguntas y contesta.

Example: wearing/ is/ he / pants?Is he wearing pants? No, he isn’t.

1) is / wearing?/ she/ what _______________________________________________

2) playing/ football?/ are/ they/ _____________________________________________

3) he/ wearing?/ is/ jeans? _____________________________________________

4) doing?/ what/ is/ he _____________________________________________

5) he/ wearing/ shoes?/ is _____________________________________________

Page 127: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 127/415

 

Enjoying a party

Read 

1. Where are they?¿Dónde están?

a) at school b) at a party

2. Read the conversation between Mike and Benjamin.

Lee la conversación entre Mike y Benjamin.

Mike: Hi. This is Mike speaking.Benjamin: Hello Mike. This is Benjamin.Mike: What’s up Benjamin? Are you coming to the party?Benjamin: Yes, I’m on my way, but tell me who is there?Mike: Oh. Here is Fiona, Maria, Fred, Charly... Everybody is here.Benjamin: What are you doing?Mike: Charly and Fiona are getting some drinks.

Maria is dancing with Fred, and I’m talking to you.Benjamin: Doh! Ok. See you in some minutes.Mike: Hurry up! Time is running fast.Benjamin: Ok. Bye.Mike: Bye.

Lesson 11

Page 128: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 128/415

 

Think 

3. Look at the words in bold. Complete the chart. Answer the questions.Observa la palabras en negritas . Completa la tabla. Responde las

preguntas.

1) Complete the chart.Completa la tabla.

Infinitive verb Verb + ing

2) To form present continuous with verbs that end with – e  we ______a) take out –e  and add -ingb) add –‘s

3) We form present continuous _________a) adding - edb) adding –ing

4) Verbs that end in vowel + consonant ( run  ), to form present continuous we ____.a) double consonant in the end+ -ing.b) add –er.

Write

4. Write two sentences about what are people doing. Use the verbs in ( ).

Escribe dos enunciados tomando en cuenta las acciones que las personasestán realizando. Usa los verbos que están entre paréntesis.

Page 129: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 129/415

 

Example: (run / sleep)

The woman is running.She is sleeping.

1) (read / write)

2) (sit / stand)

3) (play / swim)

Page 130: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 130/415

 

4) (eat / drink)

5. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

He is watching T.V.

He is taking a shower.

He is cooking chicken.

She is writing a letter.

It is snowing.

Page 131: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 131/415

 

6. Write the sentences in present continuous.Escribe los siguientes enunciados en presente continuo.

Example: (I/ read/ a book)I’m reading a book.

1) (You/ not/ eat/ banana) ___________________________________________________2) (He/ wear/ a black coat)

 ___________________________________________________3) (She/ listen/ to the radio)

 ___________________________________________________4) (They/ play/ basketball)

 ___________________________________________________5. (It/ not/ rain)

 ___________________________________________________

Speak Write

7. Work in pairs. Describe what your partner is doing.Trabaja en parejas. Describe lo que tu compañero está haciendo.

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

Page 132: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 132/415

 

What’s happening at the party?

Read

1. Answer the question.Contesta la pregunta .

Are they playing football? _____________________________________________________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Mike: Finally you are here.Benjamin: Yes, I know. Wow!

Everybody is having a lot of fun!Mike: I agree with you.Benjamin: My car is in front of your neighbor’s house.

Is it ok?Mike: No problem.Benjamin: Great. Hey who’s that girl?Mike: Which one?

Benjamin: The one that is sitting next to Maria.Mike: Ah. Her name’s Angelica. She’s very nice.Benjamin: And who’s standing behind Angelica?Mike: Ah. He is Ed. He’s her boyfriend.Benjamin: Ouch! Ok.

Lesson 12

Page 133: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 133/415

 

Benjamin has arrived to the party. T FAnybody is having fun. T FAngelica is standing next to Maria. T FEd is dancing with Angelica. T F

Think

4. Complete the chart.Completa la tabla.

between

detrás

al lado

in front of

Write

5. Look at the image. Complete the sentences using the prepositions(behind, next to, in front of and between).

Observa la imagen. Completa los enunciados usando las preposiciones(behind, next to, in front of and between).

 3. Circle T if the sentence is TRUE and F is the sentence is FALSE.  Encierra T si el enunciado es verdadero y F si es falso. 

Page 134: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 134/415

 

1) Sandra is sitting _____________ Luis and Andrea.2) Alex is sitting _____________ Luis3) Miriam is _______________ Luis.4) Luis is ______________ Andrea.5) Sandra is _____________ Alex.

6. Read the text. Draw a picture.Lee el  texto. Elabora un dibujo.

Page 135: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 135/415

 

A day in Acapulco

Read 

1. Write the date.Escribe la fecha.

2. Read the letter.Lee la carta.

Date: __________________

   

   

   

Fiona is in Acapulco. T FAcapulco is cold and it’s raining. T FThe hotel is big and comfortable. T FFiona is writing a letter to Benjamin. T FFiona and her family are coming back on Sunday. T F

Lesson 13

 3. Circle T if the sentence is TRUE and F is the sentence is FALSE.

Encierra T si el enunciado es verdadero y F si es falso. 

Page 136: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 136/415

 

Think

4. Look at the letter. Choose the answer that corresponds.Observa la carta. Escoge la respuesta que corresponda.

We use (,) to __________ .a) end a sentence or ideab) separate parts of the sentences

We use and to __________ .a) join two wordsb) connect sentences

Write

5. Write on the line (,) or and.Escribe sobre la línea ( , ) o and .

6. Write a letter similar to two.

Escribe una carta similar a la del punto dos.Date _______________

Dear ______________

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

 __________________________ __________________________

Page 137: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 137/415

 

Mini Check

Read

1. What kind of text is it?¿Qué tipo de texto es?

a) an e-mail b) a letter

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

Lesson 14

Page 138: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 138/415

 

Fred is sitting with Maria T FMike is wearing a pink sweater. T FBenjamin is drinking water. T FCharly is in front of the stereo. T FMike is having exams T F

Write

4. Complete the information according to the images. Use the verbs in thebox in the correct form.

Completa la información de acuerdo con las imágenes. Usa los verbos delcuadro en la forma que corresponde.

1) Tomas ______ Paula _____________________.

2) Victor _____ John ______ Sam ________________.

3) Bob _____________________ the piano.

4) Karla ______ Amanda ___________________ skirts.

5) Lana ___________________ a bicycle.

run study wear play ride

3. Circle T if the sentence is TRUE and F is the sentence is FALSE.  Encierra T si el enunciado es verdadero y F si es falso. 

Page 139: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 139/415

 

5. Write on the line the questions according to the answers.Escribe sobre la línea la pregunta que corresponda a las respuestas.

 __________________________________? She’s wearing a pink dress. __________________________________? No, he is watching T.V.? __________________________________? Yes, they are playing basketball. __________________________________? He is listening to music. __________________________________? No, she is not studying.

6. Write on the line where the people in the picture are. Use (next to, in frontof, behind, between).

Escribe sobre la línea dónde se ubica la gente en la foto. Usa (next to, infront of, behind, between).

Sue is _______________ Mario.Mario is ______________ Sue and Rosa.

Pedro and Rosa are ___________________ Mario.Dylan is ________________ Mario.Mario is ________________ Pedro and Rosa.Pedro is ________________ Rosa.

7. Answer the letter to Brenda with your information. Draw a picture toillustrate your letter.

Responde una carta para Brenda con tu información. Dibuja una imagenpara ilustrar tu carta.

Sue Dylan

Mario

Pedro Rosa

Page 140: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 140/415

 

Date _________________________  

Dear _____________________

 _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________

Page 141: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 141/415

 

Project: A class magazine. Part one

Read

Para reafirmar los conocimientos adquiridos a lo largo de la Unidadelaborarás una revista, utilizando dichos conocimientos pero sobre todo tucreatividad.

2. Find a magazine, look at it and analyze it.

Encuentra una revista, obsérvala y analízala.

3. Look at the list of contents the magazines often have.Observa la lista de contenidos que por lo general traen las revistas.

•  Interviews (entrevistas) •  letters (cartas)•  descriptions (descripciones) •  recipes (recetas)•  horoscopes (horóscopos) •  questionnaires (cuestionarios)•  drawings (imágenes) •  articles (artículos)•  advertisements (anuncios) •  puzzles (crucigramas)

4. Work in pairs.Trabaja en parejas.

5. Choose different contents. To create something unique, something thatcommunicates what you want to other people.

Elijan diferentes contenidos. Para crear algo único, algo que comunique loque ustedes quieren decir a otras personas.

6. Each pair most has different contents. Share what you have chosen withyour classmates for not repeating.

Cada pareja debe tener diferentes tipos de contenidos. Comparte con tus

compañeros los que elegiste para que no se repitan.

Lesson 15

 1. To affirm your acquired knowledge during this Unit you will make a class

magazine, using this knowledge and your creativity.

Page 142: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 142/415

 

Project: A class magazine. Part two

1. Begin your class magazine by organizing it into sections. Then decidewhat types of writing to put in each section.

Comienza organizando la revista en tres secciones. Después decide quetipos de contenido vas a poner en cada sección.

Information Stories Games

2. Complete the chart with the sections that you decided to use.

Completa la tabla con las secciones que han decidido usar.

3. Decide in which section of the magazine each of these types of writingshould go and complete the chart.

Completa el cuadro escribiendo los tipos de contenido en la sección quecorresponda y completa la tabla.

  Description of something or someone  Letter  Puzzle

  Interviewing  Article

  Description of something or someone.Descripción de algo o alguien.

4. Describing someone or something.Describiendo a alguien o algo.•  To describe something use details that tell exactly what you are

seeing, hearing, tasting, smelling and touching.•  A description of a person captures something special about its subject.

Lesson 16

Page 143: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 143/415

 

5. Think of someone or something you would like to describe.Piensa en algo o alguien que te gustaría describir.•  Find a picture of your subject. Study it closely. Use specific details.•  Choose someone you know well. Find a photo of your subject.

6. Prewritting.

Antes de empezar a escribir.•  Study your subject and note details.

7. Make a draft.Elabora un borrador.•  Use your prewriting notes and the picture.

Sandra lopez is a girl that is studyingsecondary in guanajuato.

Sandra has brown eyes, blond hair,she is slim and tall. She is verybeautiful, she is always smiling.

Sandra is writing a tall tale aboutanimals. She is a very good writter.

Sandra’s family loves her because sheis very sweet and lovely.

She is always helping poor people toprepare themselves at school.

Page 144: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 144/415

 

8. Revising.Revisando.•  Read you draft.•  Mark the areas that need correction.•  Read the draft to your partner and notice this out:

  Does the description paint a picture in your mind?  What details interested you? Should details be added?  Each paragraph keep to the main idea?  Should some details be taken out or moved around?

•  Make changes. Use your partner’s comments to improve your paper.•  Correct and edit.

  Did I capitalize the first letter of the proper nouns?  Did I begin titles and initials with capital letters?  Did I misspell some words? Look for the correct spelling in a

dictionary.  Are the apostrophes in the correct position?

9. Make a final copy.Elabora la copia final.•  Include all the revisions you have made.

10. Publishing.

Publicando.•  Get two pieces of construction paper and glue.•  Glue your description on one sheet of construction paper.•  Glue the photo or drawing of your subject on the other sheet.

Sandra Lopez is a girl that is studyingsecondary in Guanajuato.

Sandra has brown eyes, blond hair,she is slim and tall. She is verybeautiful, she is always smiling.

Sandra is writing a tall tale aboutanimals. She is a very good writter.

Sandra’s family loves her because sheis very sweet and lovely.

She is always helping poor people toprepare themselves at school.

Page 145: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 145/415

 

Project: A class magazine. Part three

  Interview Entrevista

1. Preparing an interview.Preparando una entrevista.•  Choose someone in your classroom that you would like to interview.•  Plan and write the questions you will ask make a list of questions that

you will ask.

Example: Is writing poems your passion?What are you doing to improve your score?

2. Interviewing.La entrevista•  Have a pencil and paper for taking notes.•  Ask the questions to the person you have chosen.•  Write the answers down in a sheet of paper exactly how he/she is

saying them. You have to be very careful to gather information.•  Listen carefully as the person talks. If you write the person’s exact

words put them in quotations (“”)•  Wait until he/she finishes talking to ask another question.•  Be polite and friendly all the time.•  Finish the interview and write your impressions about him/her.

Lesson 17

Page 146: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 146/415

 

Example:

Laura is interviewing a nurse named Janice.

Laura: Good morning Janice. Janice: Good morning Laura. Laura: In what hospital are you working?Janice: “Now I’m working at the general Hospital”. Laura: Is being a nurse a big responsibility? Janice: “Yes, it is a big responsibility”.

3. Transcription of the interview.

Transcripción de la entrevista.•  Distinguish between the one that is interviewing and the person you

are interviewing.Example: Maria: What are you doing to improve your dance technique?

Lia: I’m training eight hours per day.(Maria is interviewing Lia)

•  You have to rewrite the texts you get exactly how they were told. Usequotation marks(“”).

Example: she told me, “I´m looking for help”•  Do not repeat information.

4. Publishing.Publicando.•  Get two pieces of construction paper and glue.•  Glue your interview on one sheet of construction paper•  Glue the photo or drawing of your subject on the other sheet.

Page 147: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 147/415

 

Project: A class magazine. Part four

  Letter Carta

1. Writing a letter.Escribiendo una carta.•  Is a way to share or get information or news.

2. Prewriting.Antes de empezar a escribir.•  Choose a topic (you can ask for information, you can talk about sports,

music, movies, etc.)•  List some details and write them in order.

3. Writing.Escribiendo•  Make a draft; include the parts of the letter.

  Begin the letter introducing him/her self.  Continue telling what is happening.

Heading

Greeting

Body

Closing

Signature

Lesson 18

AddressDate

Dear…

 __________________________________________  __________________________________________  __________________________________________  __________________________________________

 __________________________________________  __________________________________________  __________________________________________

 ________________ ________________

Page 148: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 148/415

 

4. Revising.Revisando.•  Reread your letter.•  Discuss with your partner these questions:

  Does the letter include the parts of a letter?

  Each paragraphs have a main idea? Does they keep the mainidea?•  Make changes. Use your partner’s comments to improve your paper.•  Correct and edit.

  Did I capitalize the first letter of the proper nouns?  Did I begin titles and initials with capital letters?  Did I misspell some words? Look for the correct spelling in a

dictionary.  Did I use commas after the greeting and closing?  Did I use comma between the city and the street and the state?

And between the day and the year? (in the heading)

5. Make the corrections and make a final copy.Elabora las correcciones y una copia final.

6. Publishing.Publicando.•  Get two pieces of construction paper and glue.•  Glue your interview on one sheet of construction paper•  Glue the photo or drawing of your subject on the other sheet.

Page 149: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 149/415

 

Project: A class magazine. Part five 

  Article Artículo

1. Making an article.Elaborando un artículo.•  Begin choosing a topic:

  Make a list and choose the one do you like the best and thatwould be the most funny.

  Discuss with your partner and tell each other what you how todo well (examples: making a sock puppet, making a robot witha box of milk, making a paper airplane, etc.)

2. Make an observation chart.Elabora una tabla de observaciones.•  List the materials and the steps on your chart.

Materials Steps

3. Writing.Escribiendo.•  List the materials and the steps.•  Close with the way you are going to use the finished item

(Introduction, materials and explain steps, conclusion, the way ofusing).

Lesson 19

Page 150: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 150/415

 

Example:Making a sock puppet.

 

4. Revising.Revisando.•  Read your draft give step by step directions.•  Share the article with your partner and ask him to explain the steps

without looking at your article.•  Discuss with your partner:

  Did I’m giving all steps in the right order?•  Make changes. Use your partner’s comments to improve your paper.

Page 151: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 151/415

 

•  Correct and edit.  Did I capitalize the first letter of the proper nouns?  Did I begin titles and initials with capital letters?  Did I misspell some words? Look for the correct spelling in a

dictionary.

 

5. Publishing.Publicando.•  Get two pieces of construction paper and glue.•  Glue your article on one sheet of construction paper•  Glue photos or drawings of your article on the other sheet. You can

illustrate the steps.

Page 152: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 152/415

 

Project: A class magazine. Part six

  Puzzle Crucigrama

1. Making a puzzle.Elaborando un crucigrama.•  Begin making a list of ten words and verbs.•  Write sentences about the words or verbs you enlisted.•  The sentences most contain the meaning or a reference that

describes the word or verb.

2. Make a layout.Elabora un diseño.

•  Decide which of the words and verbs are going to be across andwhich ones are going to be down.

•  Write letter by letter the words in the layout.•  Mark the spaces with black lines and make squares for each letter.•  Be sure the words are complete and spelled correctly.•  Number the sentences and place the numbers in the layout.

Lesson 20

Page 153: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 153/415

 

Example:1

2

Across1. It is the action of walking quickly.

Down2. If you are looking at your notes you are ________________

2. Revising.Revisando.•  Make sure the words are spelled correctly.•  Make sure you are leaving the exact number of spaces for the words.

3. Publishing.Publicando.•  Get two pieces of construction paper and glue.•  Glue your puzzle on one sheet of construction paper

R E A D I N G

U

NN

I

N

G

Page 154: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 154/415

 

Project: A class magazine. Part seven

1. Collect all the types of writing you have madeReúne todos los contenidos que ya elaboraste.

2. Organize your information according with the chart in lesson 16.Organiza la información de acuerdo con la tabla de la lección 16.

3. Place the information according to the section.Acomoda los contenidos en las secciones que correspondan.•  Each section has to be distinguished by a title.•  Each section most have a special drawing.

4. Bind them together using string or yarn.Únelos usando hilo o estambre.

5. Give a title to your magazine.Dale un título a tu revista.•  Be creative; remember you have to give it a name according to the

contents.

6. Illustrate your magazine.Ilustra tu revista.•  Be creative remember you have to draw things according to the

contents.

7. Present your project to your classmates.Presenta el proyecto a tus compañeros.•  Discuss about your contents.

Lesson 21

Page 155: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 155/415

 

Review

1. Complete the sentences. Use my/ our/ his/ her/ their/ its.Completa los enunciados. Usa my/ our/ his/ her/ their/ its.

1) I like red color. It’s _______ favorite.2) Put on _______ coat when you go out. It’s very cold out side.3) My friends are playing basketball, _________ score is 10- 2.4) We are going to buy ________ uniforms.5) My sister loves pink color but green is _________ favorite.6) ________ pants are very cool! Adrian always is in fashion.7) My dog’s sweater is very old _________ full of holes.

2. Write on the line the name of the colors.Escribe sobre la línea el nombre de los colores .

a) __________ + yellow = greenb) red + ____________ = purplec) yellow + red = ____________d) white + ____________ = pinke) black + ____________ = gray

3. Write on the line the possessive form of the nouns. Use ( ‘s). Escribe sobre la línea la forma posesiva de los sustantivos. Usa (‘s).

Example: Susan is wearing a yellow skirt. Susan’s skirt is yellow.

1) Ana is wearing a black jacket. __________ jacket is black.2) Randy is wearing a blue scarf. __________ scarf is blue.3) Harry is wearing a green t-shirt. __________ t-shirt is green.4) Nora is wearing a pink shorts. __________ shorts are pink.5) Mike is wearing white underwear. _________ underwear is white.

4. Write on the line this/ these.Escribe sobre la línea this/these.

 _______ dress ________ jeans _______ shoes ________ pants _______ skirt ________ glasses

Lesson 22

Page 156: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 156/415

 

5. Write on the line that/ those. Escribe sobre la línea that/those.

 _______ jacket _______ blouse _______ cap _______ sneakers _______ gloves _______ socks

Review

1. Complete the crossword.Completa el crucigrama.

4

2

1 5

3

3 4

2

5

1

Across Down

1. 1.

2. 2.

3. 3.

4. 4.

5. 5.

Lesson 23

Page 157: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 157/415

 

2. Complete the text.Completa el texto.

  

  

  

3. Answer the letter to Sam. Use (my, his/her, ...), (colors, clothes), (‘s.)Responde la carta a Sam. Usa (my, his/her, ...), (colors, clothes), (‘s.)

Date: _____________________

 __________________

 ________________________________________________  ________________________________________________  ________________________________________________  ________________________________________________  ________________________________________________  ________________________________________________

 ____________________ ____________________

Page 158: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 158/415

 

4. Complete the chart. Answer the questions.Completa la tabla. Responde las preguntas.

What are youwearing?

What is your partnerwearing?

What color is it?

5. Order the words to form a sentence.Ordena las palabras para formar un enunciado.

1) (wearing/ you/ a/ t-shirt/ are) ________________________________________________________2) (is/ she/ jeans/ and/ jackets/ wearing)

 ________________________________________________________3) (they/ wearing/ are/ shorts)

 ________________________________________________________4) (Amanda/ wearing/ a/ skirt/ is/ green)

 ________________________________________________________5) (wearing/ are/ pants/ they)

 ________________________________________________________

Page 159: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 159/415

 

Review

1. What’s happening right now? Write true  sentences.¿Qué está pasando en este momento? Escribe los enunciados

verdaderos.

Example: (I/ sit/ on a chair) I’m sitting on a chair.

1) (I/ wash/ my car) ___________________________________2) (It/ rain)

 ___________________________________3) (I/ run)

 ___________________________________4) (I/ do/ this excercise) ___________________________________5) (I/ dance salsa)

 ___________________________________6) (I/ wear/ shoes)

 ___________________________________7) (I/ listen/ to the radio)

 ___________________________________

2. Order the questions.

Ordena las preguntas.

1) (you/ watch/ TV?) __________________________________________2) (the children/ play) __________________________________________3) (what/ you/ do) __________________________________________4) (you/ write/ a letter) __________________________________________5) (you/ eat/ banana) _________________________________________

Lesson 24

Page 160: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 160/415

 

3. Answer the questions.Responde las preguntas.

Are you wearing a hat? _________________________What are you doing? _________________________Is the sun shining? _________________________What are you writing? _________________________Are your parents working? ______________________

4. Complete the chart with your information.Completa la tabla con tu información.

Questions AnswersWho is next to you?You are between _______ and_____Who is in front of you?Who is next to you?

5. Complete the text. Use the words in the box.Completa el texto.Usa las palabras del cuadro.

Dear Mark,

These are my friends. All of them are ____________ secondary. Look at thepicture. We are ___________ our uniforms. Mike is _________ __________me. That pretty girl___________ ___________ Mike is Fiona. Benjamin isthe guy that is ___________. He is _____________ of me. He is my bestfriend.

Greetings,Maria

sitting studying behind next to  standing wearing smiling

Page 161: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 161/415

 

AnswerKey/Respuestas

 Lesson 7/ Mini Check

Page/ página 1131.c)Page/ página 1144.PossessiveAdjectives

DemostrativePronouns

Colors Clothes ‘s to showpossession

Pluralnouns

My These White Shorts Laura’s Glasses

Her This Black Bathingsuit

Sunglasses

Those Red

5.

R S G B I N B D O Y

Z E M L Q O H G M E

R T D A U I P L T L

B X V C A P J I G L

R L B K O M H K T O

O X O O F W X A C WW B H U J N O C Z R

N V R G S C A R F V

Y D R J J E A N S Y

S K I R T P I N K N

Page/ página 115

Page 162: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 162/415

 

Page/ página6.

Are these Pablo’s shorts? Yes, they are my pants.

Is this your favorite color? Yes, they are my glasses.

Are those your pants? Yes, that’s my favorite color.

Is that my skirt? No, these shorts are Rodrigo’s

Are these your glasses? No, this is Laura’s skirt.

Lesson 14/ Mini Check

Page/ página 83.Fred is sitting with Maria TMike is wearing a pink sweater. T FBenjamin is drinking water. TCharly is in front of the stereo. TMike is having exams .

F4. 1) Tomas and Paula are studying..

2) Victor, John and Sam are running.

3) Bob is playing the piano.

4) Karla and Amanda are wearing skirts.

5) Lana is ridding a bicycle.

F

F

F

FT

115

13

Page 163: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 163/415

 

Page/ página 95.What is she wearing? She’s wearing a pink dress.Is he reading a book? No, he is watching T.V.?Are they playing basketball? Yes, they are playing basketball.What Is he doing? He is listening to music.Is she studying ? No, she is not studying.

6.Sue is behind Mario.Mario is between Sue and Rosa.Pedro and Rosa are in front of Mario.Dylan is behind Mario.Mario is between Pedro and Rosa.Pedro is next to Rosa.

 13

Page 164: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 164/415

 

Lesson 22/ Review 

Page/ página 51.1) I like red color. It’s my favorite.2) Put on your coat when you go out. It’s very cold out side.3) My friends are playing basketball, their score is 10-2.4) We are going to buy our uniforms.5) My sister loves pink color but green is her favorite.6) His pants are very cool! Adrian always is in fashion.7) My dog’s sweater is very old its full of holes.

2.a) blue + yellow = greenb) red + blue = purplec) yellow + red = oranged) white + red = pinke) black + white = gray

3.1) Ana is wearing a black jacket. Ana’s jacket is black.2) Randy is wearing a blue scarf. Randy’s scarf is blue.3) Harry is wearing a green t-shirt. Harry’s t-shirt is green.

4) Nora is wearing a pink shorts. Nora’s shorts are pink.5) Mike is wearing white underwear. Mike’s underwear is white.

4.this dress these jeansthese shoes these pantsthis skirt these glasses

Page/ página 65.that jacket that blouse

that cap those sneakersthose gloves those socks

15

15

Page 165: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 165/415

 

Lesson 23/ Review

Page/ página1.

4

S

B 2 C O A T

1 O C 5

C O 3 K J

3 P A N T S 4 S W E A T E R

P S H A

2 O N

R 5 D R E S S

T

1 S H O E S

Page/ page 7 2. Complete the text.

Completa el texto.

 

 

 

615

15

Page 166: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 166/415

 

Page/ página 85.1) You are wearing a t-shirt.2) She is wearing jeans and jackets.3) They are wearing shorts.4) Amanda is wearing a green skirt.5) They are wearing pants.

Lesson 24/ Review

Page/ página 91.1) I’m not washing my car.2) It’s not raining.

3) I’m not running.4) I’m doing this exercise.5) I’m not dancing salsa.6) I’m wearing shoes.7) I’m not listening to the radio.

2.1) Are you watching TV?2) Are the children playing?3) What are you doing?4) Are you writing a letter?

5) Are you eating banana?

Page/ página 03.Yes, I’m wearing a hat/ No, I’m not.I am ________________________Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t.I’m writing the answers of this exercise.Yes, they are/ No they aren’t.

5.

Dear Mark,These are my friends. All of them are studying secondary. Look at thepicture. We are wearing our uniforms. Mike is sitting next to me. That prettygirl standing behind Mike is Fiona. Benjamin is the guy that is smiling. He isin front of me. He is my best friend. 

15

15

16

Page 167: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 167/415

 

Materiales de apoyo

Temas Material sugeridoPuedes consultar estaspáginas a lo largo de toda launidad .

www.epals.com 

www.rsts.net/home/epals/index.html  

www.sepiensa.org.mx/admin/aviso.html  

Programa de inglés Enciclomedia paraTelesecundaria

Bibliografía Beare, N., Links 2 Teacher´s Guide, México, Macmillan, 2005. 

Celorio, G., Smash! 2, Teacher´s Resource Book, México, RichmondPublishing, 1997.

Domínguez, E., et al., Connections one. Student’s Book , México, NuevoMéxico, 2006.

Emilsson, E., et al., Dialogues. English 1, México, Fondo de Cultura

Económica, 2002.

Enciclomedia, Inglés. Student Workbook, Nivel 1, Volumen 1. México, 2006.

Haines, P. et al., Crossroads. English 1, México, Oxford University Press,2006.

Kirn, E., et al., A Communicative Grammar , México, McGraw-Hill,1996.

Programas de Estudio. Educación básica. Secundaria. Lengua ExtranjeraInglés , México, SEP, 2006.

Salazar, J., English 1. México, Santillana, 2006.

Van der Werff, J., New Passport Student´s Book , México, RichmondPublishhing, 2006

2

Page 168: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 168/415

Page 169: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 169/415

Unit 3

INGLÉS  I

Hobbies, leissure and sport/Pasatiempos, tiempo libre y deporte

Page 170: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 170/415

Page 171: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 171/415

 

Unit  3  

El propósito de esta unidad es que los alumnos sean capaces de expresarsus intereses personales sobre los temas de pasatiempos, tiempo libre ydeporte, así como hacer / responder a invitaciones / eventos relacionadoscon el tema.

Purpose/Propósito  

Topics / Tema   

Lesson 1 I like playing videogamesLesson 2 I like to ride my bikeLesson 3 I like movies

Lesson 4 I love soccerLesson 5 My mother likes going to the moviesLesson 6 Mini CheckLesson 7 Do you like tennis?Lesson 8 Does your father like soccer?Lesson 9 Does she like cooking?Lesson 10 I like vegetables and fruitsLesson 11 David loves comicsLesson 12 Mini CheckLesson 13 Would you like to go to a party?Lesson 14 Why don’t we go to the movies?

Lesson 15 Let’s eat Mexican food

Hobbies, leisure and sport /Pasatiempos, tiempo libre y deporte

Page 172: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 172/415

 

Lesson 16 Shall we go to a rock concert?Lesson 17 Would you like to see a movie today?Lesson 18 No, thanks. I hate horror moviesLesson 19 Project. We invite to you to our St. Valentine’s

celebration. Part oneLesson 20 Project. We invite to you to our St. Valentine’s

celebration. Part twoLesson 21 Review

21 sessions, 7 weeks/ 21 sesiones, 7 semanas 

Page 173: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 173/415

 

I like playing videogames

Read

1. Look at the text. What is it?Observa el texto. ¿Qué es esto?

a) an article from a b) an e-mail c) an article from amagazine. newspaper.

2. Read the e-mail.Lee el correo electrónico.

          From: mario123 e-mail.comTo: [email protected] Subject: Greetings from Mexico

Dear David:

I’m very exited and looking forward to go to study to the United States. Ihope we can do things together. I like playing videogames and playingbasketball. I also like riding my bike and going to the movies. What aboutyou? What do you like to do in your free time?

Regards,

Mario.

Lesson 1

Page 174: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 174/415

 

Read  Write 

3. Tick the activities Mario likes doing.Escribe una junto a las actividades que le gusta realizar a Mario.

  Playing basketball.

  Riding a bike.

  Playing soccer.

  Watching T.V.

  Playing videogames.

  Dancing.

Page 175: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 175/415

 

  Going to the movies.

  Going to the supermarket.

Think 

4. Go back to the text. See what follows the verb “like” and complete.Regresa al texto. Observa qué sigue al verbo “like” y completa.

1. I ______________ videogames.2. I ______________ my bike.

5. Write a next to the activities that you like doing.

Escribe una junto a las actividades que te gusta hacer.

Riding a horse Watching T.V Playing soccer

   

Page 176: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 176/415

 

Writing stories Reading books Dancing

6. With your information write an e-mail to a friend.Con tu información escribe un correo electrónico a un amigo. 

          From: _________________________________

To: ___________________________________Subject: _______________________________

Dear ____________________ ,

 ___________________________________________________________________   ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________  

Regards,

 ______________________

     

Page 177: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 177/415

 

I like to ride my bike

Read

1. Identify the parts of the letter.Identifica las partes de la carta.

 ________________ ________________

 Opening line ________________ ________________

2. Read the letter.Lee la carta.

Lesson 2

 August 23rd , 2007

 Dear Mario:

  Thanks for your letter! I’m happy you arecoming to my country to study. I promise youwill have a great time in my house. I’m makingplans for you and me. We have similar likes. Ilike to play videogames and enjoy to ride mybike. I don’t like to go to the movie theatre butmy mom really likes to see movies. Don’t worrywe will enjoy anyway.

 Regards,

 David.

Closing lineOpening line

RecipientDate

Writer

Page 178: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 178/415

 

Think

4. Look at the example and order the sentences.Observa el ejemplo y ordena las oraciones.

Example: I like to visit my grandmother.

a) videogames / I / to / like / play /

 ____________________________________________________

b) go / movies / to / My mother / to / likes / see /

 ____________________________________________________c) ride / I / like / to / my bike /

 ____________________________________________________d) the movie theatre / don’t like / go / to / I / to /

 ____________________________________________________

Write 

3. Write TRUE or FALSE.Escribe TRUE (verdadero) o FALSE (falso).

a) David likes to play videogames. ________________b) David likes to go to the movie theatre. ________________c) David likes to ride his horse. ________________d) David’s mother likes to go to see movies. ________________e) David and Mario like similar activities. ________________

Page 179: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 179/415

 

5. Write three activities you like and three you don’t like.Escribe actividades que te gusten y que no te gusten.

  I like…   I don’t like… 

to watch T.V. to eat vegetables

6. Write a letter to a friend. Tell about your preferences.Escribe una carta a un amigo. Platica acerca de tus preferencias.

 ____________________

Dear _______________,

 __________________________________________  __________________________________________  __________________________________________  __________________________________________  __________________________________________  __________________________________________  __________________________________________  ____________________________________.

Regards,

 ___________________

Page 180: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 180/415

 

I like movies

Read

1. Look at the pictures and write the words in the chart under each one.Then answer the questions.

Observa los dibujos y escribe las palabras del cuadro debajo de cadauno. Después contesta las preguntas.

 _______________ ______________ ______________ _______________ _______________ ______________ ______________ _______________

Horror movies Romantic moviesAction movies Comedy movies

Lesson 3

Page 181: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 181/415

 

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Mrs. Smith: Hello Mario.Welcome to our house.

Mario: Thank you Mrs. Smith.I’m so happy to be here.

Mrs. Smith: So, you like to see movies?Mario: Yes, I love movies.Mrs. Smith: What kind of movies do you like?Mario: I like comedy and action

movies. And you?Mrs. Smith: Really? I love action movies

but I also like romantic movies.

Write

3. Write a   or a   according Mario and Mrs. Smith like. Thencomplete the sentences.

Escribe una o una de acuerdo con lo que le gusta a la señoraSmith y a Mario. Después completa las oraciones.

See movies AdventurousMovies

RomanticMovies

ActionMovies

Mrs.SmithMario

a) Mrs. Smith likes _____________________ and ___________________.b) Mario likes ______________________ and ______________________.

a) What kind of movies does Mrs. Smith likes? _______________________b) What kind of movies does Mario likes? ___________________________

Page 182: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 182/415

 

5. Choose one word to complete the sentences.Elige una palabra para completar las oraciones.

a) I like _________________.

apples

like

Gerunds

Infinitives ____________________  

 ____________________ ____________________

Nouns ____________________ ____________________ ____________________  

Think

4. Go back to lessons 1, 2 and 3 to complete the chart.Regresa a las lecciones 1, 2 y 3 para completar el cuadro.

Page 183: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 183/415

 

b) I don’t like _________________.basketball

c) My mother doesn’t like _____________. movies

d) I love ______________________. bananas

e) Mrs. Smith likes ______________.soccer

f) I like ______________________. aerobics

6. Find someone who is agreeing with you. Complete the conversation.Encuentra a alguien que coincida contigo. Completa la conversación.

You: What kind of movies do you like?Classmate: I like _____________________________________________:

I don’t like ________________________________________.What about you?

You: Well, I like ________________________________________.But I don’t like _____________________________________.

Page 184: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 184/415

 

I love soccer

Read

1. Read and show an expression in your face to each sentence.Lee y muestra una expresión en tu cara para cada enunciado.

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Mario: What about you Mr. Smith?Do you like romantic movies?

Mr. Smith: No, that’s not for me. I hate them.I like horror movies, but you know,what I really enjoy is watching

soccer games. I love soccer.Mrs. Smith: Oh! Please, don’t start talkingabout soccer. I don’t like soccer.

Mario and Mr. Smith: Ha, ha, ha…

I don’t likesoccer.

I loveromanticmovies.And you

Robert?

I hateromanticmovies.

I lovesoccer.and youMario?

Lesson 4

Page 185: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 185/415

 

Write

3. Circle T (True) or F (False)Encierra T  (True – verdadero) o  F  (False – falso)

a) Mr Smith likes horror movies. T Fb) Mrs. Smith doesn’t like soccer. T Fc) Mr. Smith loves soccer. T Fd) Mr. Smith hates romantic movies. T Fe) Mr. Smith doesn’t like watching soccer games. T F 

Think 

4. Look at the images and write: I like, I love, I dont’ like, I hate.Observa las imágenes y escribe: I like, I love, I don’t like, I hate.

       

5. Complete with your information about the kind of movies.Completa con tu información acerca de los tipos de películas.

a) I like _______________________ and ________________________.b) I don’t like _____________________ and _____________________.c) I love ______________________ and ________________________.d) I hate ______________________ and ________________________.

6. Complete the dialogue with words from the box. Then act it to the class.

Page 186: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 186/415

 

Completa el diálogo con las palabras del cuadro. Después actúalo a tuclase.

You: Hello I’m doing a survey about movies. _________________________________________________?

Classmate: I like ______________________________________________.You: So, do you like witches, monsters and ghosts?Classmate: Yes, I like them.You: Do you like romantic movies?Classmate: ____________________________________.You: Do you like _______________________________________?Classmate: Yes, I love them. I like Martians, heroes, pirates, cars.

Lesson 5 

My mother likes going to the movies

Read

1. Complete the letter.Completa la carta.

No, I don’t.action movies

What kind of movies do you likehorror movies

Dear Mom

Mario

September 3rd , 2007

Page 187: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 187/415

 

2. Read the letter.Lee la carta.

Write

3. Correct the sentences. Use the information from the letter.Corrige las oraciones. Usa la información de la carta.

a) The father’s name is Philip. _____________________________________________________________b) Robert doesn’t like watching soccer games.

 _____________________________________________________________c) Sully likes going to the supermarket.

 _____________________________________________________________d) David likes playing soccer.

 _____________________________________________________________e) The dog likes playing with a shoe.

 _____________________________________________________________f) Sully doesn’t like cooking.

 _____________________________________________________________

 ______________________

 ______________,

I think a lot about you, although the family I’mstaying with is very nice. The father’s name isRobert. He likes watching soccer games onSundays and sometimes I join him. The mother’sname is Sally. She likes going to the movies andcooking. Their son, David likes playing basketballthe same as me. He has a dog and it also likesplaying with a ball. We play basketball everyday.

Kisses,

 _____________

Page 188: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 188/415

 

Think

4. Write the verbs in the category that corresponds.Escribe los verbos en la categoría que corresponda.

loves eat hates plays eats hateplay sleep swims swim sleep love

5. Draw ,  or ,  according your information.D ibuja  ,  o ,  de acuerdo con tu información.

WatchingT.V

Soccer Movies Swimming

My mother

My father

My brother

My sister

She, he, it I, you, they, welikes likeloves love

Page 189: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 189/415

 

6. Complete the letter with you information.Completa la carta con tu información.

 __________________________

Dear ________________.

How are you? I’m O.K. You asked about my family. Well,my mother’s name is ______________. She likes

 ________________. She doesn’t like _______________and she hates ________________. My father’s name is

 _______________ and he likes ______________. My

father hates ______________ and loves _______________. What do your Mother and Father like?Please tell me about.

Regards,

 _______________

Page 190: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 190/415

 

Lesson 6 

Mini Check

Read Write

1. Write the names.Escribe los nombres.

Mario’s family.

Mario _ ______________ ______________ _____________Son Daughter Mother Father

2. Read the text. Mario is introducing himself at his new classmates.Lee el texto. Mario está presentándose ante sus nuevos compañeros.

Teacher: Good morning. We have a new student.

Mario: Hello, I’ Mario. I’m from Mexico. At recent I’m living at David’s house. I

have a small family, we are four members. My mother, my father, mysister and myself. My mother’s name is Rosalia. She  is a secretary.She likes her job and cooking. My father, Francisco, is a teacher. Heloves to teach and to play soccer with his students. My sister’s name isSandra. She is a student in secondary school, she doesn’t like

Page 191: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 191/415

 

mathematics. And about me, I like to learn English and playingvideogames. About sports, I don’t like boxing because I think it isaggressive, I prefer basketball. We love have dinner togheter.

Classmates: Nice to meet you Mario.

Write

3. Write TRUE or FALSE.Escribe TRUE (verdadero) o FALSE (falso) 

a) Mario has a big family. __________________

b) Rosalia likes her job. __________________

c) Francisco loves teaching. __________________d) Sandra loves mathematics. __________________

e) Mario prefers playing basketball. __________________

f) Francisco doesn’t like soccer. __________________

g) Mario hates boxing. __________________

h) Rosalia likes cooking. __________________

Page 192: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 192/415

 

Think 

4. Complete the chart with the words underlined in the text. Completa el cuadro con las palabras subrayadas en el texto.

Infinitive ______________________

He likes ______________________ ________ ______________________It ________ Gerund

 ______________________ ______________________

 ________ ______________________

You love Noun ________ ______________________They ________ ______________________

 ______________________

5. Underline the correct option.Subraya la opción que corresponda.

a) SandraA) She likes her job and cooking. b) Rosalia

c) Francisco.

a) MarioB) He loves playing soccer. b) Sandrac) Francisco

a) RosaliaC) She doesn’t like mathematics. b) Mario

c) Sandra

a) MarioD) He hates boxing. b) Francisco

c) Sandra

Page 193: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 193/415

 

6. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

Occupations Likes

 _______ _______ a) He likes to win golden medals at _______ a doctor the Olympic Games. _______ b) She loves writing stories with

correct punctuation marks. _______ c) He doesn’t like modern music. _______ d) He hates junk food. _______ a Spanish teacher e) She loves to heal people at the _______ hospital.

f) He hates noise. _______ g) He loves doing exercise. _______ h) She doesn’t like people when _______ an athlete people die. _______ i) She hates to get sick.

 j) She doesn’t like mathematics,she prefers Spanish.

 _______ k) He loves to playing the guitar. _______ l) He likes playing the piano. _______ a musician m) She likes reading. _______ n) She likes to help people.

o) He doesn’t like jeans and boots,He prefers pants and tennisshoes.

p) She hates studentsdon’t do homework.

7. Write about your family. Look at Mario’s example. Draw your family in thechart.

Escribe acerca de tu familia. Toma el ejemplo de Mario. Dibuja a tufamilia en el cuadro.

Hello, I’m _________________. My family is ________________(big/small)We are ______________ members. _______________________________

 ____________________________________________________________  ____________________________________________________________  ____________________________________________________________  ____________________________________________________________.

Page 194: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 194/415

 

Do you like tennis?

Read

1. Write the underlined word under each picture.Escribe la palabra subrayada debajo de cada imagen.

 ____________________ ___________________ ____________________

Lesson 7

Page 195: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 195/415

 

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

David: Let me show you my room.Mario: O.K.David: Look. I like sports and movies that’s the reason why I have many

posters on the wall.Mario: Do you like tennis?David: No, I don’t. That’s my father’s racquet. I like soccer as I said in my

letter.Mario: Do you like comics?David: Yes, I do. I love them. They’re interesting and funny. What about

You, what else do you like?Mario: Well, I like listening to music and going to the movies.

Write

3. Answer the questions with your information.Contesta las preguntas con tu información.

a) Do you like swimming? ________________________

b) Do you like basketball? ________________________c) Do you like English? ________________________

Page 196: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 196/415

 

d) Do you like reading stories? ____________________

e) Do you like riding a horse? ____________________

Think 

4. Complete the sentences.Completa las oraciones.

Yes, I _____________.a) _________ you like basketball? No, I ______________.

5. Interview to some classmates and complete the chart with  or . Entrevista a algunos compañeros y completa el cuadro con  o . 

Use:Usa :

Do you like…?

Name Basketball Soccer WatchingT.V.

Dancing

6. Write about one classmate. Use the information in the chart.Escribe sobre uno de tus compañeros. Usa la información del cuadro.

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

Page 197: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 197/415

 

Does your father like soccer?

Read

1. Identify Mario’s and David’s bedroom.Identifica la recámara de Mario y la de David.

 ______________________

 _______________________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

David: This is your room. I hopeyou like it.

Mario: Sure, thanks. It’s great.I’m going to hang a pictureof my family. Look, this ismy mother, my sister, myfather and me.

David: Does your father love socceras mine?

Mario: Yes, he does. He plays with

Lesson 8

Page 198: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 198/415

 

his students.David: Does he like to see movies?Mario: No, he doesn’t. he prefers to

watch T.V soccer games.David: Our fathers have similar likes.

Write 

3. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

a) Does Mario’s father love soccer? ________________________________b) Does Mario’s father play soccer with his students? __________________

c) Does Mario’s father like to see movies? ___________________________d) Does Mario’s father prefer to watch T.V. soccer games? ______________

Think 

4. Circle the correct sentence. Encierra la oración que corresponda.

a) Do he like soccer? b) Does he like soccer?

a) Yes, he does. b) Yes, he do.

a) No, he doesn’t. b) No, he don’t.

5. Design an interview for a classmate.Diseña una entrevista para un compañero de tu clase.

a) What’s your mother’s name?b) Does she like cooking?c) ________________________________________?d) ________________________________________?

Page 199: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 199/415

 

e) _________________________________________?f) _________________________________________.?

6. Interview to your classmate and write the answers. Then write a text.Entrevista a tu compañero y escribe las respuestas. Después escribe un

texto.

a) ________________________________b) ________________________________c) ________________________________d) ________________________________e) ________________________________f) _________________________________

 _______________ mother’s name is ______________. She likes ________ _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

Does she like cooking?

Read 

1. Identify the place where Mrs. Smith and Mario are. Write a. Identifica el lugar donde están la señora Smith y Mario. Escribe una . 

Lesson 9 

Page 200: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 200/415

 

  Bedroom  Kitchen  Dinning room

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Mario: Good morning Mrs. Smith. What are you doing?Mrs. Smith: Good morning Mario. I’m cooking breakfast. I love it.

Mario: I know, David said to me.Mrs. Smith: Does your mother like cooking?Mario: Yes, she does. And she does it very well.Mrs. Smith: Really? Tell me about her. What does she like cooking?Mario: he likes coking vegetables and chicken.Mrs. Smith: Does she go to the supermarket?Mario: No, she doesn’t. She goes to the market. There she also buys fruit.Mrs. Smith: I love Mexican markets. They’re so pretty!

Page 201: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 201/415

 

Write 

3. Circle the correct option.

Encierra la opción que corresponda.A) Mrs. Smith is cooking:a) dinner b) pizza c) breakfast

B) Mario’s mother likes:a) coking b) sleeping c) swimming

C) Does Mrs. Smith like cooking?a) No, she doesn’t. b) Yes, she does. c) No, she don’t.

D) Where does Mario’s mother buy fruits and vegetables?a) in the supermarket. b) in the grocery. c) in the market.

E) Does Mrs. Smith hate Mexican markets?a) No, she doesn’t. b) Yes, she does. c) No, she don’t.

Think 

4. Complete the chart.

Completa el cuadro.

Do / Don’t Does / Doesn’tthey itwe

Page 202: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 202/415

 

5. Look at the pictures and classify them.Observa los dibujos y clasifícalos.

Fruits Vegetables ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

6. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

 _____ Does your mother like onion? a) No, it doesn’t. _____ Do you like apples? b) Yes, he does. _____ Does your father love pears? c) Yes, they do. _____ Does your dog like grapes? d) Yes, I am. _____ Do your friends like oranges? e) No, she doesn’t.

apples avocado chili peppers pineapple lettuce

onion grapes pears tomatoes oranges

Page 203: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 203/415

 

I like vegetables and fruits

Read

1. Unscramble the words and complete the list of the supermarket.Acomoda las palabras y completa la lista del supermercado.

a) DAVOCAO _______________________b) PNEIPALEP _______________________c) ONINO _______________________d) NGEROA _______________________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Mr. Smith: Do you have the list of the super David?David: Yes, I have it. We have to buy carrots, tomatoes and a lettuce.Mario: Don’t forget the cucumbers.David: You’re right. Do you like vegetables Mario?

Mario: Yes, but I don’t like broccoli. And you?David: I like some vegetables, but I hate onion. I think it is sad, it alwaysmakes you cry.

Mr. Smith: Ha, ha, ha! And, what about fruits Mario?

Lesson 10

LIST

CARROTS __________________ __________________

CUCUMBER __________________ __________________

Page 204: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 204/415

 

Mario: Well, I like oranges, apples and strawberries, but I hate bananas andpapaya.

Mr. Smith: What a shame! Bananas and papaya are in the list. I love them.

Write 

3. Join with a line.Une con una línea.

He likes some vegetables, but hates onion.Mario

He hates papaya and bananas.

Mr. Smith He loves papaya and bananas.

He likes vegetables, but doesn’t like broccoli.David

He likes oranges, apples and strawberries.

Page 205: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 205/415

 

Think

4. Complete the sentences.Completa las oraciones.

* You use this word to join ideas.

I like oranges, apples ____________ strawberries.

I love vegetables ________________ fruits.

* You use this word to contrast an idea.

I like vegetables, ________________ I don’t like onion.

I like fruits, _____________________ I hate bananas.

Write

5. Write a list of fruits and vegetables.Escribe una lista de frutas y verduras.

Fruits __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________

Vegetables __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________

Page 206: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 206/415

 

6. Ask to a classmate and write  or  next to each word on the list.Then write about she or he.

Pregunta a un compañero y escribe o     junto a cada palabra en lalista. Después escribe acerca de él o ella.

 __________________ likes vegetables but __________________________

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________.

 __________________loves fruits but _______________________________ _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________. 

David loves comics

Read 

1. Underline the best option.Subraya la mejor opción.

A) In the letter, who is Sandra?

a) Sandra is Mario’s mother.b) Sandra is Mario’s sister.c) Sandra is Mario’s girlfriend.

Lesson 11

Page 207: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 207/415

 

2. Read the letter.Lee la carta.

Write 

3. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

 _______ He likes comics. a) Roxane. _______ He doesn’t like water. b) David. _______ She hates soccer games. c) Sandra. _______ She loves fashion shows. d) Philip.

 _______ He writes the letter. e) Sandy. _______ She is Mario’s sister. f) Mario.

October 4th, 2007.

Dear Sandra,I miss you a lot. I hope you are getting goodgrades at school. I want to tell you about mynew friends at school. David, Sandy, Philipand Roxane. David likes comics. Sandy lovesfashion shows. Philip doesn’t like water andRoxane hates soccer games. We havedifferent likes but all we are good friends.They are so kind with me and help me to learnmore about English. Please, send me back a

letter or an e-mail. I love you.Kisses,

Mario.

Page 208: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 208/415

 

Think 

4. Answer the question.Contesta la pregunta.

A) What do you notice in next words?

a) likes and comics b) loves and movies c) hates and games

B) Write the rule. _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

Write

5. Complete the sentences.Completa las oraciones.

a) She _____________ _______________.(love) (grape in plural)

b) He ______________ _______________.(like) (movie in plural)

c) He _______________ _____________________.(hate) (soccer game in plural)

d) My father _______________ ________________.(prefer) (sport in plural)

e) My mother ______________ delicious potatoes.(cook) (potato)

f) My sister _____________ strawberries.(like) (strawberry)

Page 209: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 209/415

 

6. Imagine you are far away from your family. Write a letter to your sister orbrother telling about your new friends and their preferences.

Imagina que estás muy lejos de tu familia. Escribe una carta a tu hermanoo hermana contándole sobre tus nuevos amigos.

 ___________________

Dear _____________,

I miss you a lot. _____________________ ___________________________________________  ___________________________________________  ___________________________________________  ___________________________________________ 

 ___________________________________________  _______________.

Kisses,

 _____________

Page 210: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 210/415

 

Mini Check

Read 

1. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Steve: Do you like soccer, Mario ?Mario: No, not really, I like basketball. And you Steve, do you like playing

soccer?Steve: Yes, I like it but I hate basketball. What about you David, what sports

do you like?David: I like swimming and basketball and I love playing soccer.Steve: Yes, we know. And what about you Philip?Philip: I hate swimming because I don’t like water, it is always cold.David: We think you don’t like to take a shower. Ha, ha, ha, ha.

Lesson 12 

Page 211: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 211/415

 

Write

2. Use the information from the dialogue to write

 or

. And

  or

. Usa la información del diálogo para escribir         o     . Y             o       .

Sport Steve Mario David PhilipBasketballSoccerSwimming

3. Match the word with the picture. Write the name of the sport on the line.Relaciona la palabra con el dibujo. Escribe sobre la línea el nombre del

deporte.

cycling  ______________ ______________ _____________

 ______________ ______________ ______________ _____________

swimming soccer baseball cyclingvolleyball basketball tennis running

Page 212: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 212/415

 

Think

4. Does the dialogue mention any sports you play in your school at recess orin the Physical Education class?

¿En el diálogo mencionan algunos deportes que tú juegas en la escuelaen el receso o en la clase de Educación Física?

Yes__________ No ___________

Which one? ___________________________________________________

Read Write 

5. Read and answer the questions about you.Lee y contesta las preguntas acerca de ti.

a) What sports do you like? _____________________________b) Does your father like baseball? _____________________________c) Do you like swimming? _____________________________d) Does your mother like cooking? _____________________________e) Do you like basketball? _____________________________f) Does your sister like mathematics? _____________________________g) Does your brother like movies? _____________________________

6. Use the questions to interview a classmate and complete the text.Usa las preguntas para entrevistar a un compañero y completa el texto.

a) What sports do you like? ___________________________________b) Do you like baseball? ___________________________________c) Do you like swimming? ___________________________________d) Do you like volleyball? ___________________________________e) Do you like basketball? ___________________________________

Page 213: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 213/415

 

 ______________ likes _____________, _____________ and ___________,(name)

but ________________ doesn’t like ______________ and ______________.(he/she)

Would you like to go to a party?

Read 

1. The dialogue is about:El diálogo habla de:

a) a baseball game b) a party c) a concert

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

David: What are you doing?Mario: I’m cleaning my bedroom.David: Do you like parties?Mario: Yes, I love them.David: Would you like to go to a party?Mario: That sounds great, but I have to finish my chores. When is it?

David: It’s today at five in the afternoon. You have time enough to do them.Mario: O.K. Where is it?David: It’s at Sandy’s house. It’s her birthday.Mario: Do you have a gift for her?David: Yes, of course.

Lesson 13

Page 214: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 214/415

 

Write 

3. Complete the sentences.Completa las oraciones.

a) __________________________________? I’m cleaning my bedroom.

b) Do you like parties? ______________________

c) __________________________________? That sounds great.

d) __________________________ the party? It is at Sandy’s house.

e) Do you have a gift for her? Yes, _________________.

Think

4. Go back to the dialogue. Identify the question to make invitations.Regresa al diálogo. Identifica la pregunta para hacer invitaciones.

You use __________________________ to make an invitation.

5. Write  or  in the charts about your preferences.Escribe  o en los cuadros acerca de tus preferencias.

 A soccer game  A pic nic in the forest.  An expeditionto the mountain.

Page 215: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 215/415

 

 An exhibition at the  A birthday party.  A rock concertArchaeological Museum.

6. Interview to a classmate using the images in exercise 5. Use the chart toregistry the answer.

Entrevista a un compañero tomando en cuenta las imágenes del ejercicio5. Usa el cuadro para registrar las respuestas. 

Would you like to go to…? Student 1 Student 2a soccer game Yes No Yes NoYes No Yes NoYes No Yes NoYes No Yes No

Yes No Yes NoYes No Yes No

7. Exchange your opinion with the class about which activities attracted morestudents.Inter cambia tu opinión con la clase para identificar cuáles actividades

atrajeron a más estudiantes.

Page 216: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 216/415

 

Why don’t we go to the movies?

Read

1. Order the days of the week and answer the question.Ordena los días de la semana y contesta la pregunta.

1. Monday_______________  2. _____________________3. _____________________  

4. _____________________5. _____________________  6. _____________________7. _____________________

a) Say what day it is in the dialogue. ________________________________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Mrs. Smith: Today is Sunday! What are we going to do?Mr. Smith: There is an excellent soccer game at the stadium.Mrs. Smith: No, I don’t like soccer!Mario: No, I don’t like soccer!

Lesson 14

WednesdayTuesdayFriday

Sunday

ThursdaySaturdayMonday

I don’t like soccer!I don’t like soccer!

Page 217: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 217/415

 

David: Relax. Why don’t we go to the movies?Mrs. Smith: That’s a good idea.David: There is a romantic movie, a horror movie and an action movie.

What would you like to see?Mario: I’d like an action movie. What do you think?Mrs. andMr. Smith: An action movie it’s O.K.

Write

3. Write TRUE or FALSE.Escribe TRUE (verdadero) o FALSE (falso).

a) It is Monday. _____________

b) Mr. Smith suggests to go to a soccer game. _____________c) Mario likes soccer. _____________d) David suggests to go to the movies. _____________e) They decide to see a romantic movie. _____________f) Mrs. Smith agrees with David to go to the movies. _____________

Think

4. Write the missing expression.Escribe la expresión que falta.

Situation Optional invitation

I don’t like romantic movies. __________________ see an action movie.

5. Get in a team of four students to complete the dialogue.

Forma un equipo de cuatro estudiantes para completar el diálogo.

Student A: What are we going to do next weekend?Student B: Why don’t we ___________________________________?

Page 218: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 218/415

 

Student C: No, _________________________________.Student D: So, why don’t we_________________________________?Student A: Yes, ________________________________.

What do you think?Student B: ____________________________________.Student C: ____________________________________.

6. Act out your dialogue to your class.Actúa el diálogo a la clase.

Let’s eat Mexican food

Read

1. Write the correct letter on the line.Escribe la letra correcta sobre la línea. 

Mexican food. _______Chinese food. _______Fast food. _______

a) b) c)

Lesson 15

MACHAMBURGERS

Combo 1Fries

Bacon hamburgerSodaPie

Combo 2Chicken hamburger

Baked potato

Ice creamJuice

Dragon China

Chop SueyNoodles

Rice with porkFried rice

DrinksSodasWater

Green tea

Mi taquitoDrinks

Fruit waterSodasJuice

TacosEnchiladas

SopesMole

Fajitas

Page 219: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 219/415

 

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

David: The movie was exiting, wasn’t it?Mario: Yes, you’re right but now I’m hungry.Mr. Smith: Me too. Let’s eat Chinese food.Mrs. Smith: No, I’d prefer Mexican food. What do you think Mario?Mario: Wow! It’s a great idea. I miss Mexican food a lot.David: I would like to try “ tacos”.Mr. Smith: O.K. You’re the winners. Let’s eat Mexican food.

Then let’s go for an ice cream.

Write

3. Write on the line the number according to the sequence of the events inthe dialogue.

Escribe sobre la línea el número de acuerdo con la secuencia de loseventos en el diálogo.

 _______ Mrs. Smith doesn’t want Chinese food, she prefers Mexicanfood.

 _______ At the end of the movie Mario is hungry. _______ Finally, they decide to eat Mexican food. _______ Mr. Smith suggests to eat Chinese food.

 _______ David would like to try “tacos”.

Page 220: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 220/415

 

Think

4. Complete the sentences.Completa las oraciones.

 ________________ is another way to make an invitation. For example:

a) _______________ eat Chinese food.b) _______________ watch a soccer game.

5. Ask to a classmate about the menus. Write a or next to the food ordrink that he or she prefers.

Pregunta a un compañero tomando en cuenta los menús. Escribe  o  junto a la comida o bebida de su preferencia.

Do you like…?

  hamburgers

  tacos    chop suey

  soda

  mole

  fruit water

  fried rice

  pie

  green tea

6. Answer the question and invite to your classmate to eat.Contesta la pregunta e invita a tu compañero a comer.

a) What kind of food does your classmate like? _______________________

Page 221: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 221/415

 

Shall we go to a rock concert?

Read

1. What is the dialogue about?¿De qué trata el diálogo?

a) a soccer game b) a rock concert c) an exhibition.

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

David: Look Mario, there will be a rock concert next weekend. Shall we go?Mario: Yes, I’d love to. Rock music is my favorite.David: Let’s ask my father.David: Can we go to the rock concert dad?Mr. Smith: Mmmmm! What time is it?Mario: It’s at eight in the evening Mr. Smith. And it finishes at eleven o’clock.Mr. Smith: It’s too late.

Mario

and

Mr. Smith: O.K. But your mother and me let’s wait for you at the end of theconcert.

Lesson 16

David

: Please, please, please.

Page 222: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 222/415

 

Write

3. Circle the option that corresponds.Encierra la opción que corresponda.

A) Mario and David are going to assist to a…a) party b) rock concert c) soccer game

B) The rock concert is at …a) eight in the evening b) eight in the morning c) nine in the evening

C) What time does the concert finish?a) at eight o’clock b) at one o’clock c) at eleven o’clock

D) Mario’s favorite music is…

a) classical b) pop c) rock

E) Who do Mario and David ask for permission?a) Mrs. Smith b) Mr. Smith c) Mario’s mother

Think

4. Complete the chart with information from previous lessons.Completa el cuadro con información de lecciones anteriores.

Expressions to make an invitation Expressions to accept aninvitation

Page 223: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 223/415

 

5. Complete the dialogue with the options from the chart.Completa el diálogo con las opciones del cuadro.

Sandy: Look David there is a fashion show next Saturday. ________________________________?

David: No, that’s not for me. Look, there is a car show on Sunday.Shall we go?

Sandy: I don’t think so. I don’t like cars.David: Well, there is a basketball game at the school gymnasium on

Sunday. ________________________________?Sandy: ____________________________________. I like basketball.

6. Practice the dialogue with a classmate and act it to the class.Practica el diálogo con un compañero y actúalo para tu clase.

Would you like to see a movie today?

Read 

1. Match the activity with the picture.Relaciona la actividad con el dibujo.

a) They are chatting.

b) They are speaking on phone.

Lesson 17

Shall we goShall we go

There is a car showThat’s a good idea

Page 224: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 224/415

 

 ______________________________ _____________________________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Ring, ring, ring!

Sandy: Hello!David: Hi, this is David.Sandy: Yes, I am.David: What are you doing?Sandy: I’m listening to music.David: Would you like to see a movie today?Sandy: No, thanks. Today I’m going to visit my grandmother.David: O.K. I understand. What about tomorrow?Sandy: Yes, I’d love it.David: O.K., see you tomorrow at three o’clock at your house.Sandy: Sure. See you tomorrow.

Write

3. Correct the sentences according to the dialogue.Corrige las oraciones de acuerdo con el diálogo.

a) Sandy is watching T.V. _________________________________________________

b) Sandy has to visit her grandfather. _________________________________________________

Page 225: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 225/415

 

Think

4. Complete with the expressions underlined in the dialogue.Completa con las expresiones subrayadas en el diálogo.

Answers

 ____________________________Invitation

 __________________________

 ____________________________

5. Read the expressions.Lee las expresiones.

Would you like to go to the park?Would you like to go to the museum?Let’s to see a movie in your house.

Yes, I’d love it.Yes, of course.

That’s a good idea.

That sounds great.No, thanks.No, I prefer stay at home.

There is an interesting exhibition.

c) David invites Sandy to a soccer game. _________________________________________________

d) David is going to see Sandy at school. _________________________________________________

e) David is going to see Sandy at five o’clock. _________________________________________________

Page 226: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 226/415

 

6. Use the expressions to make a dialogue.Usa las expresiones para hacer un diálogo.

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

No, thanks. I hate horror movies

Read 

1. Find five cognates in the dialogue. Encuentra cinco cognados en el diálogo.

a) _______________________b) _______________________

c) _______________________d) _______________________e) _______________________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Mr. Smith: What are you doing?Mrs. Smith: I’m writing an e-mail to Mario’s mother.Mr. Smith: Good! Shall we go to the stadium when you finish?

Mrs. Smith: Thanks but I don’t like soccer as you know.Mr. Smith: Well, why don’t we go to the movies? Today is the premier of

Killerman.Mrs. Smith: No, thanks. I hate horror movies.Mr. Smith: So, would you like to visit the zoo?

Lesson 18

Page 227: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 227/415

 

Mrs. Smith: No, I can’t. I have to visit the dentist at five o’clock. Why don’tyou come with me?

Mr. Smith: O.K. Let’s to visit the dentist.

Write

3. Write TRUE or FALSE.Escribe TRUE (verdadero) o FALSE (falso).

a) Mrs. Smith is watching T.V. _____________b) Mrs. Smith hates horror movies. _____________c) Mr. Smith invites to Mrs. Smith to the movies. _____________d) Mrs. Smith and Mr. Smith are going to visit the zoo. _____________e) Mrs. Smith has a date with the dentist. _____________

Think

4. Complete the invitations and the chart.Completa las invitaciones y el cuadro.

a) Why don’t we __________________________________________?b) Shall we ______________________________________________?c) Would you like to _______________________________________?d) Let’s _________________________________________________

Page 228: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 228/415

 

Yes No

Yes, I love it.Yes, I’d like.

That sounds great.It’s _________________idea.

No, ____________________.No, I prefer stay at home.

No, thank you. I’m very busy.Thanks, I prefer to watch T.V

5. Work in pairs to make a dialogue.Trabaja en parejas y elabora un diálogo.

You: Why don’t we _____________________________________________Classmate: No, _____________________________________________You: _________________________________________________________Classmate: No, _____________________________________________You: _________________________________________________________Classmate: Yes, _____________________________________________

Project. We invite to you to our St. Valentine’s celebration. Part one

1. In order to enrich friendship and love between your classmates and all thestudents from your school you can organize a celebration the St. Valentine'sday. First, write a letter to ask for permission to the principal at your school.You can use the letter below.

Para enriquecer la amistad y el amor entre tus compañeros y todos losalumnos en tu escuela puedes organizar el festejo del día de San Valentín.Primero, escribe una carta para pedir permiso al Director de tu escuela. Usael formato de la siguiente carta.

Lesson 19

Page 229: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 229/415

 

2. Copy the letter in a sheet of paper and send it to the Principal. Wait forthe answer.

Copia la carta en una hoja de papel y envíala al Director. Espera larespuesta.

3. Discuss with your classmates and the teacher about the date, place andhour for the St. Valentine’s celebration. Answer the questions.

Discute con tus compañeros y maestro acerca de la fecha, el lugar y lahora para la celebración del día de San Valentín. Contesta las preguntas.

a) Where is the celebration? ______________________________________b) When is the celebration? _______________________________________c) What time is the celebration? ___________________________________

d) Who are going to assist to the party? _____________________________

 ______________________

Dear Principal ____________________:

The first grade group ______ would like tocelebrate _____________________________day.

 ________________________________________  ________________________________________  ________________________________________  ________________________________________  ________________________________________  _______________________________________.

Regards, _____________

Page 230: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 230/415

 

4. Discuss about the food and drinks for the party. Make a list.Discute acerca de la comida y bebidas para la fiesta. Haz una lista.

Food Drinks __________________________ _____________________________ __________________________ _____________________________ __________________________ _____________________________ _____________________________ ________________________________ __________________________ _____________________________ __________________________ _____________________________ __________________________ _____________________________

5. How are you going to invite the students from your school to your party?¿Cómo van a invitar a los alumnos de la escuela a su fiesta?

With a: a) Letter

b) Invitation card. c) E–mail.

Project. We invite to you to our St. Valentine’s celebration. Part two

1. Design an invitation card for the St. Valentine’s party. Look at the example.Diseña una tarjeta de invitación para la fiesta del día de San Valentín.

Observa el ejemplo.

Lesson 20

Page 231: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 231/415

 

2. Give an invitation to each student at your school.Da una invitación a cada uno de los alumnos en tu escuela.

3. Next class you are going to do your party. After that exchange opinionsabout what happened.

En la próxima clase ustedes realizarán su fiesta. Después intercambiaopiniones acerca de lo que pasó. 

Review

Read Write 

1. Unscramble the words according to the images.Acomoda las letras para formar palabras tomando en cuenta las

imágenes.

RECOCS NSITNE GWSIMNMI

 _________________  _________________ ________________

Lesson 21

Page 232: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 232/415

 

BXONGI LLASBEKTBA YLLABVEOLL _________________  _________________ ________________

2. Look at the chart and complete the text.Observa el cuadro y completa el texto.

Soccer Basketball BoxingMario      

David      Mrs. Smith      Mr. Smith      

Mario likes _______________ but, he doesn’t like _______________ and ________________ boxing.David likes soccer and ______________ but, he doesn’t like ____________.Mrs. Smith hates ______________. She doesn’t like ________________but, she likes basketball.Mr. Smith loves _______________. He likes ________________ but, hedoesn’t like __________________.

3. Label the words.Ubica las palabras.

apples, oranges, pineapple,mangoes, watermelon, bananas

Page 233: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 233/415

 

4. Answer the questions with your information.Contesta las preguntas con tu información.

a) Do you like vegetables? ____________________________b) Does your mother like apples? ____________________________c) Does your father like fruits? ____________________________d) What’s your favorite fruit? ____________________________e) Do you like oranges? ____________________________

5. Order the dialogue.Ordena el diálogo.

 _______Sandy: When is it?1 Mario: Sandy what kind of movies do you like?

 _______Sandy: Yes, I’d love it. _______Sandy: I like comedy movies and horror movies. _______Mario: It’s next Friday at four o’clock. _______Mario: Would you like to go to the premier of “Killerman”.

6. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Roxane: Hi! What are you doing?David: We are planning a party at Philip House.

Page 234: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 234/415

 

Roxane: That sounds great.Sandy: We are talking about food. Shall we prepare some sandwiches?Philip: No, is better to ask some pizzas.Mario: Yes, that’s a good idea. I love pizzas. Why don’t we buy some sodas

too?David: Sure. I buy the sodas.Roxana: Would you like a chocolate cake?Philip: Yes, of course. It’s my birthday.Mario: So, let’s to invite some clowns.

7. Complete the chart with information from the dialogue.Completa el cuadro con información del diálogo.

Invitations Answers

Page 235: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 235/415

 

Lesson 6/ Mini Check

1.

Mario’s family.

Mario Sandra Rosalia  FranciscoSon Daughter Mother Father

3.

a) Mario has a big family. FALSEb) Rosalia likes her job. TRUE c) Francisco loves teaching. TRUEd) Sandra loves mathematics. FALSEe) Mario prefers playing basketball. TRUEf) Francisco doesn’t like soccer. FALSEg) Mario hates boxing. TRUEh) Rosalia likes cooking. TRUE

4.Infinitiveto teach 

He likes to playShe to learnIt loves  Gerund

cookingplaying

I  love NounYou job

We like mathematicsThey boxing

basketball

AnswerKey/Respuestas 

Page/ página 190

Page/ página 191

Page/ página 192

Page 236: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 236/415

 

5.a) Sandra

A) She likes her job and cooking. b) Rosaliac) Francisco.

a) MarioB) He loves playing soccer. b) Sandra

c) Francisco

a) RosaliaC) She doesn’t like mathematics. b) Mario

c) Sandra 

a) MarioD) He hates boxing. b) Francisco

c) Sandra

6.Occupations Likes

eh a) He likes to win golden medals ati a doctor the Olympic Games.n b) She loves writing stories with

correct punctuation marks.b c) He doesn’t like modern music. j d) He hates junk food.m a Spanish teacher e) She loves to heal people at thep hospital.

f) He hates noise.a g) He loves doing exercise.d h) She doesn’t like people wheng an athlete people die.o i) She hates to get sick.

 j) She doesn’t like mathematics,she prefers Spanish.

c k) He loves to playing the guitar.f l) He likes playing the piano.

k a musician m) She likes reading.l n) She likes to help people.

Page/ página 192

Page/ página 193

Page 237: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 237/415

 

o) He doesn’t like jeans and boots,He prefers pants and tennisshoes.

p) She hates studentsdon’t do homework.

Lesson 12/ Mini Check

2.Sport Steve Mario David Philip

Basketball                 

Soccer              Swimming          

3. 

cycling  soccer running baseball 

swimming soccer baseball cyclingvolleyball basketball tennis running

Page/ página 211

Page/ página 211

Page 238: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 238/415

 

swimming  tennis volleyball basketball

Lesson 21/ Review.

1.

RECOCS NSITNE GWSIMNMI

SOCCER TENNIS  SWIMMING

BXONGI LLASBEKTBA YLLABVEOLL

BOXING BASKETBALL VOLLEYBALL

Page/ páginas 231-232

Page 239: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 239/415

 

2.Soccer Basketball Boxing

Mario      David      

Mrs. Smith      Mr. Smith      

Mario likes basketball but, he doesn’t like soccer and boxing.David likes soccer and basketball but, he doesn’t like boxing.Mrs. Smith hates soccer. She doesn’t like boxing but, she likes basketball.Mr. Smith loves soccer. He likes boxing but, he doesn’t like basketball. 

3.

pineapple oranges

apples watermelon

bananas mangoes 

apples, oranges, pineapple,mangoes, watermelon, bananas

Page/ página 232

Page/ página 233

Page 240: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 240/415

 

5.

5  Sandy: When is it?1 Mario: Sandy what kind of movies do you like?4 Sandy: Yes, I’d love it.2 Sandy: I like comedy movies and horror movies.6 Mario: It’s next Friday at four o’clock.3 Mario: Would you like to go to the premier of “Killerman”.

7.

Invitations AnswersShall we prepare some sandwiches?  That sounds great.

Why don’t we buy some sodas? No, is better to ask some pizzas.Would you like a chocolate cake? That’s a good idea.

Let’s to invite some clowns. SureYes, of course.

Page/ página 233

Page/ página 234

Page 241: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 241/415

 

Materiales de apoyo 

Temas Material sugeridoSi los estudiantes deseansuscribirse a alguna de estaspáginas para intercambiarcorreos electrónicos y hablarsobre sus gustos y preferenciaso hacer invitaciones.

• www.epals.com • www.rsts.net/home/epals/index/html  

Bibliografía

Beare, N., Links 2 Teacher´s Guide, México, Macmillan, 2005.

Celorio, G., Smash! 2, Teacher´s Resource Book,  México, RichmondPublishing, 1997.

Domínguez, E. et al ., Connections one. Student´s Book,  México, NuevoMéxico, 2006.

Emilsson, E. et al ., Dialogues. English 1, México, Fondo de CulturaEconómica, 2002.

Haines, P. et al ., Crossroads. English 1. México, Oxford University Press,

2006.

Kirn, E. et al ., A Communicative Grammar, México, McGraw-Hill, 1996.

Programas de Estudio. Educación básica. Secundaria. Lengua ExtranjeraInglés, México, SEP, 2006.

Salazar, J., English 1. México, Santillana, 2006.

Van der Werff, J., New Passport Student´s Book,  México, RichmondPublishing, 2006.

Page 242: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 242/415

Page 243: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 243/415

Unit 4Daily Life/Vida diaria

INGLÉS I

Page 244: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 244/415

Page 245: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 245/415

Unit 4

Daily Life/Vida diaria

Purpose/Propósito

El propósito de esta unidad es capacitar a los estudiantes a describiracciones que pasan diaria o periódicamente en sus vidas o en la vida deotras personas y animales en los que estén interesados.

Topics/Temas

 

Lesson 1 Long distance callLesson 2 It’s quarter past eightLesson 3 What time is it?Lesson 4 What time does the next bus leave?Lesson 5 I start at 8 o’clock in the morningLesson 6 I wake up at 11:30 a.m. on SaturdaysLesson 7 Mini CheckLesson 8 Jessica gets up at 6 o’clockLesson 9 Jessica loves basketballLesson 10 He studies in Queens UniversityLesson 11 Does he wake up at half past five?Lesson 12 Romina doesn’t have a sisterLesson 13 I visit the dentist twice a yearLesson 14 Mini CheckLesson 15 How often do you have English class?Lesson 16 Today is my birthdayLesson 17 Does she usually have breakfast at 8 o’clock?Lesson 18 Are you healthy?Lesson 19 Sending an e-mailLesson 20 Crocodiles are endangered speciesLesson 21 Elephants live in Africa

245

Page 246: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 246/415

 

Lesson 22 Do Bengal tigers live in the forest?Lesson 23 Where do grey whales travel in the winter?Lesson 24 Mini CheckLesson 25 Project: Come and visit our school zoo. Part oneLesson 26 Project: Come and visit our school zoo. Part two

Lesson 27 Project: Come and visit our school zoo. Part threeLesson 28 Project: Come and visit our school zoo. Part fourLesson 29 Review. Part oneLesson 30 Review. Part two30 sessions, 10 weeks/ 30 sesiones, 10 semanas

246

Page 247: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 247/415

Lesson 1

Long distance call

Read

1. Answer the question about the dialogue.Responde la pregunta sobre el diálogo.

a) a letter b) an article c) dialogue

2. Look at the pictures and read the dialogue.Observa las imágenes y lee el diálogo.

Ring, Ring, RingJessica: Hello. This is Jessica Flores speaking from Mexico.Nikki: Hello. This is Nikki.Jessica: Nikki, How are you? I’m almost going to bed here it’s ten o’clock  p.m.Nikki: I’m fine. I’m getting ready to go to school here in England it’s eight

  o’clock in the morning.Jessica: It’s great to hear you! At what time do you enter to school?Nikki: At eight fifteen a.m. I’m late call you back later.Jessica: O.K. Have a nice day! Goodbye.Nikki: Bye.

What kind of text is it?

247

Page 248: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 248/415

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Nikki is in Mexico. T FJessica is in Mexico. T FJessica is going to bed. T FNikki is going to school. T FNikki enters to school at ten fifteen. T F

Think

4. Go back to the dialogue. Answer the question and complete the chart.Regresa al diálogo. Responde la pregunta y completa la tabla.

We use _________ to tell the time.a) it’sb) its

Time Time Traduction

ten o’clock 10:00  8:15

Write

5. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

ten fifteen 3:20

five o’clock 11:13

three twenty 2:00

seven forty two 9:54eleven thirteen 5:00

two o’clock 5:20

five twenty 10:15

nine fifty four 7:42

248

Page 249: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 249/415

6. Answer the questions and draw the hands of the watches.Responde las preguntas y dibuja las manecillas de los relojes.

Example: What time is in France?It’s ten sixteen.

What time is it now?It’s ____________________________.

What time is your English class? _______________________________.

What time is it in New York? _______________________________.

Lesson 2

It’s quarter past eight

Read

1. Answer the question.Responde la pregunta.

Where is Jessica?

a) at home b) at school

249

Page 250: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 250/415

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Mom: Jessica, it’s getting late!Jessica: What time is it?Mom: It’s a quarter to seven.Jessica: I’m almost done!Mom: You are going to miss the bus!

Jessica: Mom, I’m in trouble! The bus had left me it’s quarter past seven

Mom: You are right! You are in trouble young girl!

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Jessica is getting ready to go to school. T FJessica is way to school. T FJessica missed the bus. T FJessica’s mom is happy because Jessica missed the bus. T FJessica is in trouble. T F

Think

4. Choose the answer that corresponds.Elige la respuesta que corresponda.

We say _________ when there are remaining minutes to the hour.

a) quarter tob) quarter past

250

Page 251: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 251/415

We say _________ when there are minutes plus.

a) quarter to

b) quarter past

5. Complete the chart.Completa la tabla.

12:50 ten to one  2:25 twenty five past two  1:15 Quarter 11:30 Half    1:05 Five

Write

6. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

fifteen past ten 2:40

five to eight 11:30

twenty past five 4:15

a quarter to six 9:05

half past eleven 7:55

quarter past four 5:20

twenty to three 10:15

Five past nine 5:45

251

Page 252: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 252/415

7. Complete the information.Completa la información.

Example: It’s two fifteen.It’s fifteen past two.

 ____________________________   ____________________________ 

  _____________________________   _____________________________

 _____________________________   _____________________________ 

  _____________________________   _____________________________ 

Lesson 3

What time is it?

Read

1. Answer the question.Responde la pregunta.

What is this?a) a chat screen b) an e-mail c) an article

252

Page 253: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 253/415

2. Look at the chatting screen. Read the dialogue.Observa la pantalla de chat. Lee el diálogo.

 Find friends and chat with people all over the world in www.worldfriend.com

 Jessica says: 

Good morning!

Rachid says:

Good afternoon!

 Jessica says:

Afternoon? What time is it there?

Rachid says:

Here in Morocco it’s quarter past two p.m. What’s the time in Mexico now? Jessica says:

It’s quarter past nine a.m.

 Rachid says:

So, Morocco is 5 hours ahead Mexico.

 Jessica says:

Yes, we aren’t living at the same time!

09:40

Rachid, I have to go, see you later.

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if the it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Jessica is chatting with a friend in Monaco. T FIt’s 9:45 a.m. in Mexico. T FRachid is in Morocco. T FMorocco is five hours ahead Mexico. T FIt’s 2:15 p.m. in Morocco. T F

253

Page 254: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 254/415

Think

4. Go back to the dialogue. Answer the questions.Regresa al diálogo. Responde las preguntas.

Different ways in English to ask the time:a) ______________________________________ ?b) ______________________________________ ?

Write

5. Look at the map. Order the words to form a question and answer it.Observa el mapa. Ordena las palabras para formar una pregunta y

contéstala.

England

RUSSIA

W

254

Page 255: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 255/415

Example:

Chile/ What/ the/ ’s/ time/ in/ ?

What’s the time in Chile?It’s twenty past four p.m./ It’s four twenty p.m..

1) time/ is/ in/ What/ it/ Russia? ______________________________________________?It’s ___________________________________________ 

2) in/ China/ What/ the/ ’s/ time/ ? ______________________________________________It’s ___________________________________________ 

3) is/ in/ time/ England/ What/ it/ ? ______________________________________________It’s ___________________________________________ 

4) Sydney/ What/ the/ ’s/ time/ in/ ? ______________________________________________It’s ___________________________________________ 

5) time/ is/ in/ What/ it/ Dakar? ______________________________________________It’s ___________________________________________ 

6) Alaska/ What/ the/ ’s/ time/ in/ ? ______________________________________________It’s ___________________________________________ 

Speak

6. Work in pairs. Choose different places from the map above. Ask yourpartner about the time in different countries.

Trabaja en parejas. Elige diferentes lugares del mapa anterior. Pregunta atu compañero acerca del tiempo en diferentes ciudades.

255

Page 256: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 256/415

Lesson 4

What time does the next bus leave?

Read

1. Answer the question about the text.Responde la pregunta acerca del texto.

Where are Jessica and her mother going?a) to Africa b) to Puebla c) to Queretaro

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Jessica: Mom, what time do you wantto go to the bus station?

Mom: I would like to go at 6 o’clock inthe morning.

Mom: Jessica, it’s five thirty get ready to go.Jessica: What time does the bus leaves?

Mom: I don’t have the tickets yet. I’m going  to buy them when we get there.Jessica: O.K., we have to hurry.

Mom: I want two tickets to Puebla, please.  What time does the next bus leave?

 Assistant: The next one is at 7:30 a.m.Mom: And what time does it arrives?

 Assistant: At 10 30 a.m. it takes three hours  to get there.

Mom: How much do they cost?

 Assistant: They cost about $150.00.Mom: Give me two, please.

 Assistant: These are your tickets; your busleaves at 7:30 a.m. in gate two.

256

Page 257: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 257/415

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Jessica and her mother are going to go to the busstation at 6 o’clock in the morning. T FJessica wakes up at five thirty. T FJessica’s mother has already bought the tickets. T FThe bus leaves at 7:30 and arrives at 11:30. T FEach ticket costs are $150.00. T F

Think

4. Find on the text the expressions in English to ask about time when activi-ties happen:

Encuentra en el texto las expresiones en inglés para preguntar acerca deltiempo cuando ocurren las actividades.

 __________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________

Write

5. Match the columnsRelaciona las columnas.

What time do you have breakfast? She does exercise in the morning.

What time does she do exercise? He goes to church in theafternoon.

What time do you start school? I do homework in the afternoon.

What time do you do homework? I start at school at 7:30 a.m.

What time does he go to church? I have breakfast at 9 o’clock.

257

Page 258: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 258/415

Speak Write

6. Work in pairs. Answer the questions with your information. Ask the samequestions to your partner and write the answers.

Trabajen en parejas. Responde las preguntas con tu información.Pregunta a tu compañero las mismas preguntas y escribe las respuestas.

Question 1

 _____________________________________________?

You

Partner

Question 2

 _____________________________________________?

You

Partner

Question 3

 _____________________________________________?

You

Partner

Question 4

 _____________________________________________?

You

Partner

Question 5

 _____________________________________________?

You

Partner

258

Page 259: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 259/415

Lesson 5

I start at 8 o’clock in the morning

Read

1. Write on the line the hour that corresponds.Escribe sobre la línea la hora que corresponde.

 ________________ _________________ _________________

2. Read the interview with a rock star.Lee la entrevista a una estrella de rock.

Interviewer: Hi! I’m reporting to Star Magazine.  What time do you start playing?

Jack Jackson: I start at 8 o’clock in the morning.Interviewer: What time do you stop playing?Jack Jackson: I stop playing at 6 o’clock in the

  afternoon. At that time I go homeand have dinner.

Interviewer: What do you do at night?Jack Jackson: I use to write my lyrics and be with

  my family.Interviewer: Are having a concert soon?Jack Jackson: Yes, I’ll be playing in September

in Buenos Aires, Argentina.

259

Page 260: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 260/415

3. Answer the questions.Responde las preguntas.

What’s the name of the magazine? _____________________________________________________________ Does Jack Jackson start playing in the morning?

 _____________________________________________________________ What time does he go home?

 _____________________________________________________________ What does he do at night?

 _____________________________________________________________ When is he having a concert?

 _____________________________________________________________ 

Think

4. Go back to the interview. Look at the words in bold. Complete theinformation.

Regresa a la entrevista. Observa las palabras en negritas. Completa lainformación.

8 o’clock

that time At

Midnight

the afternoon

September 

In

the summer

in the morning in the afternoon in the evening/ at night

260

Page 261: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 261/415

Write

5. Complete the gapped text. Use in/at .  Complete los espacios del texto. Usa in/at.

Berta every day _____ the morning takes a shower then she gets ready

to go to school. She enters school ______ seven thirty _____ the

morning. She go back to her house _____ half past one. _____ the

afternoon she do homework.

Speak Write

6. Work in small groups. Complete the chart with your partner’s information.Trabaja en grupos pequeños. Completa la tabla con la información de tu

compañero.

Name In themorning

At (hour) In theafternoon

At (hour) At night

Leticia get up 6:00 a.m. do

homework

4:00 p.m. go to

sleep

261

Page 262: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 262/415

Lesson 6

I wake up at 11:30 a.m. on Saturdays

Read

1. Answer the question.Responde la pregunta.

What is this text?a) an article b) an interview c) an e-mail

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

 

  From: [email protected]  To: [email protected]  Subject: Hello, Nikki!Dear Nikki,

Hello, I’m Jessica. Today is Saturday. On  Saturdays I wake up at half past elevenbecause I don’t go to school on Saturdays. On Sundays I go downtown with my parentswe get back home approximately at three and have a meal. I go to bed early at night.

On weekdays I go to school, I enter at seven thirty a.m. I go swimming after school onMondays and Wednesdays.

Write me soon.

Regards,Jessica

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Jessica is writing an e-mail to Nikki. T FJessica doesn’t go to school on Saturdays. T F

262

Page 263: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 263/415

Jessica and her family go to church on Sundays. T FOn Sundays, Jessica go to bed late. T FJessica goes swimming on Mondays and Wednesdays. T F

Think

4. Go back to the text. Look at the words in bold. Complete the information.Regresa al texto. Observa las palabras en negritas. Completa la

información.

7:30at

Saturdays

Weekdayson

Write

5. Complete the gapped text. Use on/at .  Completa los espacios del texto. Usa on/at.

 

  From: [email protected]  To: [email protected]  Subject: Hello, Nikki!Dear Nikki,

Hello, George. Today is Friday. ______ weekdays I go to school from Monday to Friday.

 _____ Fridays I use to visit my grandmother and ______ night I watch scary movies. ______ Saturdays I like to go biking I wake up early in the morning ______ 8 o’clock. Igo back home to have breakfast ______ ten thirty a.m.I like when my parents take me to visit museums _______ Sundays.

Please send me an e-mail and keep in touch.Regards,

Jessica

263

Page 264: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 264/415

Speak Write

6. Work in small groups. Complete the chart with your partners information.Trabaja en grupos pequeños. Completa la tabla con la información de tus

compañeros.

Name Onweekdays

At On yourbirthday

At OnChristmas

Samuel Go to

school

7:30 a.m. Have a

party

Night Have a

special

dinner

Lesson 7

Read

1. Write the hour on the line.Escribe la hora sobre la línea.

Quarter past ten ___________________Half past two ___________________

Four fifty six ___________________

Mini Check

264

Page 265: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 265/415

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Jessica: I’m very happy to hear you again!

Nikki: Yes, my dear. I’m happy too.Jessica: What time do you start school?Nikki: I start school at 8 o’clock in the  morning.Jessica: What time do you have lunch?Nikki: I have lunch at three or three thirty.Jessica: What time do you do homework?Nikki: In the afternoon. After that I go and

play basketball.Jessica: What time is it now?Nikki: Here it’s half past eight p.m.Jessica: Where do you go on Saturdays?Nikki: On Saturdays we go to visit my  grandparents.Jessica: Me too, on weekends I go to visit

my grandparents.

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Jessica is happy about speaking with Nikki. T FNikki starts school at nine 8 o’clock in the afternoon. T FNikki does homework at night. T FOn Saturdays, Nikki goes to visit her grandparents. T FOn Saturdays, Jessica goes to visit her grandparents. T F

Think

4. Go back to the dialogue. Complete the chart.Regresa al diálogo. Completa la tabla.

At … On … In …

8 o’clock

265

Page 266: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 266/415

5. Find on the dialogue a phrase for asking time. Write it on the line.Encuentra en el diálogo la frase para preguntar acerca del tiempo.

Escríbela sobre la línea.

 _______________________________________________________

Write

6. Look at the clocks and underline the answer that corresponds. Completethe information.

Observa los relojes y subraya la respuesta que corresponde. Completa lainformación.

What time is it?

It’s five past two. At midnight  It’s five to two. __________________

What time is it?

It’s five past seven. _________________It’s five to seven. _________________

What’s the time?

It’s twenty past four. __________________It’s twenty to four. __________________

266

Page 267: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 267/415

What time is it?

It’s half past eight. __________________It’s half to eight. __________________

What’s the time?

It’s thirty five past ten. __________________   It’s thirty five to ten. __________________

What time is it?

It’s quarter past nine. __________________It’s quarter to ten. __________________

Speak Write

7. Work in pairs. Write a dialogue similar to exercise two. Practice saying it.Trabaja en parejas. Escribe un diálogo similar al del ejercicio dos. Practica

diciéndolo.

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

267

Page 268: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 268/415

Lesson 8

Jessica gets up at 6 o’clock

Read

1. Complete the information.Completa la información.

 _____ Wednesday _____ night _____ the afternoon _____ ten o’clock _____ the evening _____ the weekend

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

My name is Jessica. I get up at 6:00 in the morning and make my bed. Then I

take a shower and get ready to go to school, after that I help my mother to

make breakfast and then I have breakfast. Then I go to school and when I

come back home, I have lunch and then I do exercise and after that I do my

homework.

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Jessica gets up at 6:30 in the afternoon. T FShe makes her bed before taking a shower. T FJessica takes a shower at night. T FShe has breakfast before going to school. T FJessica does exercise in the afternoon. T F

268

Page 269: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 269/415

Think

4. Go back to the text. Look at the underlined and bold words. Complete theinformation.

Regresa al texto. Observa las palabras subrayadas y negritas. Completala información.

Do make have take go

Exercise

Write

5. Write on the lines the activities in the box that corresponds to the image.

Escribe sobre las líneas las actividades del cuadro que correspondan a laimagen.

take a shower have lunch make coffee

do homework go to parties

do the shopping watch TV

269

Page 270: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 270/415

watch TV

 _______________________ ________________________

 ________________________ ________________________

 ________________________ ________________________

270

Page 271: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 271/415

Speak Write

6. Work in pairs. Complete the sentences with your information. Share andcompare with your partner.

Trabaja en parejas. Completa las oraciones con tu información. Compartey compara con tu compañero.

I get up at 7:30 a.m.

I have breakfast _______________________________ 

I have lunch _______________________________ 

I do homework. _______________________________ 

I watch TV _______________________________ 

I have dinner _______________________________ 

Lesson 9

Jessica loves basketball

Read

1. Remember about your geography classes. Answer the questions.Recuerda tus clases de geografía. Responde las preguntas.

Where is located Guanajuato?

 ________________________________________________________ 

What are the states in their border? ________________________________________________________ 

271

Page 272: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 272/415

2. Read the text.Lee el text.

Jessica Flores is a secondary student. She lives  in Guanajuato. She is a

very smart girl. She loves  to go to school. She walks  to the bus stopearly in the morning and takes the bus to school.

She likes  to play basketball. She plays  in the basketball team of the

school. She thinks  sports are very interesting. She enjoys  watching

professional basketball with her father.

3. Answer the questions about the text.

Responde las preguntas acerca del texto.

Where does Jessica live? ______________________________________________________ How does she go to school?

 ______________________________________________________ What does Jessica like to do?

 ______________________________________________________ What does Jessica think about sports?

 ______________________________________________________ Do you like sports?

 ______________________________________________________ Which sport do you practice?

 ______________________________________________________ 

272

Page 273: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 273/415

Think

4. Look at the words in bold in the text. Complete the chart.Observa las palabras en negritas en el texto. Completa la tabla.

I/ we/ you/ they he/ she/ itlivelove

takeslikes

playenjoys

workthinks

5. Choose the answers that correspond.Elige las respuestas que correspondan.

To form simple present in 3rd person singular, we add ________ to verbsending with –e vowel (examples: like, love, raise, etc).

a) -esb) -s

To form simple present in 3rd person singular, we add ________ to verbsending in a consonant (examples: wear, walk, sing, etc.).

a) -iesb) -s

To form simple present in 3rd person singular, we add ________ to verbsending in vowel + y (examples: play, say, pay, etc).

a) -s

b) -es

273

Page 274: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 274/415

Write

6. Complete the sentences with the words in the box. Write it in the rightform.

Completa los enunciados con las palabras del cuadro. Escríbelo en laforma que corresponde.

Example: Laura speaks four languages.

George ______________ vegetables.He always eats junk food.

sing speak drink readlisten buy hate

My father _____________ five cups of coffee a day.

Lupita _____________ when she istaking a shower.

274

Page 275: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 275/415

 Alfred ______________ classical music.

Mark ________________ poems.

Cathy ________________ fruits in the market.

Speak Write

6. Write a text about a famous singer you like. Share it with your classmates.Escribe un texto acerca de un cantante famoso que te guste. Compártelo

con tus compañeros.

 _______________ is a famous ___________________. He/ She is _______years old. _____________________________________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

275

Page 276: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 276/415

Lesson 10

He studies in Queens University

Read

1. According to the text, choose the answer that corresponds.De acuerdo al texto, elige la respuesta que corresponda.

What’s his occupation?a) a biologist b) a doctor c) a chef

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

Carol Pavlov is from Poland. He is 26 years old.He lives in Canada. He works part time at theChateau Meilleur Hotel in the restaurant Antiques.He is a professional chef. He loves cooking.

On a typical day he gets up at 6 o’clock,

takes a shower and has breakfast. Then hegoes to school. He studies at QueensUniversity. He tries all the time to getvery good notes that’s why he does hishomework after he goes to work.

In the afternoon he goes to work. First hewashes his hands before he starts cooking.Then he prepares vegetables, meat,sandwiches, etc.

He gets home at about eight o’clock in theevening and he watches TV, studies or sometimes reads a book. He brushes his teethbefore going home.

276

Page 277: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 277/415

3. Answer the questions about the text.Responde las preguntas acerca del texto.

Where is Carol Pavlov from? _____________________________________Where does he work? ___________________________________________Where does he study? __________________________________________What kind of food he prepares? ___________________________________What does he do when he go home? _______________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________ 

Think

4. Look at the words in bold. Complete the chart and choose the answer thatcorresponds.

Observa las palabras en negritas. Completa la tabla y elige la respuestaque corresponda.

To form simple present in 3rd person singular, we add ________ to verbsending in consonant + –y  (examples: study, try, cry, etc).

a) eliminate –y and add -iesb) eliminate –y and add -s

I/ we/ you/ they he/ she/ itstudytry

criescarries

flymarry

To form simple present in 3rd person singular, we ________ to verbs thatend in –ch,-s,-sh, -z, -x, or -o (examples: wash, watch, pass, etc.).

a) -esb) –ies

277

Page 278: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 278/415

I/ we/ you/ they he/ she/ itwashfinish

brusheswatchescatchpass

goesfix

Be/ is and have/ has are two ____________ verb forms.

a) regularb) irregular 

Write

5. Write on the line the words in the box in the right form. Look at the images.Escribe sobre la línea las palabras del cuadro en la forma que correspon-

de. Observa las imágenes.

Example:

Sue is a teacher.She teaches math at secondary school.

teach have kiss go

fly catch cry

He is a very good receiver.He __________ all the passes.

278

Page 279: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 279/415

 An insect ____________ six legs.

 Alan likes art.He ____________ to the museum frequently.

Lisa __________ her boyfriend because sheloves him.

 A condor is a kind of bird.It __________ very high.

That baby _________ because he is hungry.

279

Page 280: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 280/415

Speak Write

6. Write a paragraph text a person you know. Share it with your classmates.Escribe un texto acerca de una persona que conozcas. Compártelo con

tus compañeros. _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

Lesson 11

Does he wake up at half past five?

Read

Ordena las letras para formar una palabra. Posteriormente responde la pregunta acerca del diálogo.

c/o/d/r/o/t t/s/i/t/e/c/n/i c/t/e/h/a/r/e ________________ ________________ ________________

What’s the occupation of Jessica’s father? _______________

1. Order the letters to form a word. Then answer the question about thedialogue.

280

Page 281: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 281/415

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Jessica: This is my father. His name is Sandro he’s a primary teacher. He is  45 years old.

Romina: What does he do?Jessica: He teaches Spanish lessons.Romina: Does he work in the city?Jessica: No, he doesn’t. He teaches in a rural community in a municipality of   Huixquilucan. He gets up very early to get there. He wakes up at

  half past five.Romina: Does he get up at five thirty?Jessica: Yes, he does. It’s because it takes one hour and a half to get to the

 school where he teaches.Romina: Do you feel you proud of him?Jessica: Yes, I am. I love him.

3. Answer the questions about the dialogue.Responde las preguntas acerca del diálogo.

Does Sandro teach Spanish lessons? ______________________________Does he teach in an urban community? _____________________________Does it take a long time to get to his work? ___________________________

Does Jessica is proud of his father? ________________________________Do you feel proud about someone in your family? Why? _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

281

Page 282: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 282/415

Think

4. Go back to the dialogue. Find on the expressions used to ask about habitor routines.

Regresa al diálogo. Encuentra las expresiones usadas para preguntaracerca de hábitos o rutinas.

Example: Do you like English classes?

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

5. Choose the answer that corresponds.Elige la respuesta que corresponde.

We use do with these pronouns _______ .a) you, we, theyb) he, she, it

We use does with these pronouns _______ .a) you, we, theyb) he, she, it

Discover the rule: When we use does the verb in present simple _____.a) doesn’t changeb) changes

Write

6. Order the words to form a question and answer it according to the images.Ordena las palabras para formar una pregunta y respóndela de acuerdo

con las imágenes.

Example: he/ basketball/ Does/ play/?Does he play basketball?No, he doesn’t.

282

Page 283: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 283/415

1) parties/ like/ she/ Does/?

 ____________________________________  ____________________________________ 

2) school/ to/ Saturday/ he/ go/ Does/ on/?

 ____________________________________  ____________________________________ 

3) exercise/ she/ Does/ do/?

 ____________________________________  ____________________________________ 

4) music/ listen/ she/ Does/ to/?

 ____________________________________  ____________________________________ 

5) bake/ a/ cake/ she/ Does/?

 ____________________________________  ____________________________________ 

283

Page 284: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 284/415

Lesson 12

Romina doesn’t have a sister

Read

1. Complete the information.Completa la información.

He is the son of your grand parents. ____________________ She is the daughter of you uncle. ____________________

He is the brother of your mother. ____________________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Jessica: Tell me now about your family.Romina: My mother is a nurse and my father is a

  mechanic.Jessica: Dou you have any brothers or sisters?Romina: I don’t have sisters, but I have two

brothers.

Jessica: How old are they?Romina: Jeff is five years old and Brandon is eight.

 And you?Jessica: I don’t have either brothers or sisters.Romina: Well, we can be as close as sisters!Jessica: That sounds great!

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Romina’s mother is a nurse. T FRominas’s father is carpenter. T FRomina has two sisters. T FBrandon is eight years old. T FJessica has two brothers. T F

284

Page 285: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 285/415

Think

4. Choose the answer that corresponds.Elige la respuesta que corresponde.

We use _______ for activities that do not occur.a) shouldn’tb) don’t/ doesn’t

5. Complete the chart.Completa la tabla.

Write

6. Write on the line don’t/ doesn’t .

Escribe sobre la línea don’t/ doesn’t.Laura ________ eat eggs for breakfast. She prefers to eat cereal and fruit.She ________ drink orange juice. She drinks grape juice.

Mauricio is very clean but he _________ clean his room every day. He nevercleans his room.

I _______ go to parties on Mondays. I go to school on Mondays. I ________read magazines. I read the newspaper.

 Pronouns Don’t/ doesn’t Verb Predicate

I/ you/ they/ we play soccerHe/ she/ it have sisters

285

Page 286: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 286/415

7. Write the negative statements.Escribe la forma negativa.

Example: I play soccer with my friends.

I don’t play soccer with my friends.

1) I take a shower in the afternoon. ______________________________________________

2) She takes the bus to go to school. ______________________________________________

3) We have lunch at 5:30 p.m. ______________________________________________

4) They watch TV in the evening. ______________________________________________

5) I brush my teeth after breakfast. ______________________________________________

6) You wash your hands before eating meals. ______________________________________________

Lesson 13

I visit the dentist twice a year

Read

1. Answer the question.Responde la pregunta.

What is the text about? __________________________________________________________

286

Page 287: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 287/415

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

I visit the dentist twice a year . Every six months I go tovisit the dentist. He checks my teeth. I don’t have cavitiesbecause I brush my teeth three times a day andwhenever I eat something. I try not to eat candies orbubble gum. I use dental floss also to take care of myteeth. My dentist says that it’s very important to visit himregularly to prevent cavities and to keep your mouthhealthy. He recommends visiting the dentist minimumonce a year .

3. Answer the questions about the text.Responde las preguntas acerca del texto.

How often does he visit the dentist? _____________________________________________________________ Does he see the dentist once a month?

 _____________________________________________________________ How often does he brush his teeth?

 _____________________________________________________________ Does he have cavities?

 _____________________________________________________________ What’s the recommendation of the dentist?

 _____________________________________________________________ 

287

Page 288: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 288/415

Think

4. Go back to the text. Look at the words in bold. Complete the charts.Regresa al texto. Observa las palabras en negritas. Completa las tablas.

once x 1 weektwice x 2

 ________ times x 3four times x 4 school yearmany times

 A

Write

5. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

1. once a day once a week

2. once a week once every six months

3. twice a week four times a month

4. twice a year eight times a month

5. four times a month seven times a week

6. twelve times a year once a month

weekweekend

3 years

every

year

288

Page 289: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 289/415

6. Write sentences about you. Use the expressions from the box.Escribe enunciados acerca de ti. Usa las expresiones del cuadro.

1. _______________________________________________________ .2. _______________________________________________________ .3. _______________________________________________________ .4. _______________________________________________________ .5. _______________________________________________________ .6. _______________________________________________________ .7. _______________________________________________________ .

Speak

7. Share your sentences with your classmates.Comparte tus enunciados con tus compañeros.

Lesson 14

everyday twice a week once a yearevery year four times a month

three times a week every three months

Read

1. Answer the questions.Responde las preguntas.

a) Who’s the writer?

Charly / Linda Perry

b) Who’s the recipient?

Charly / Linda Perry

Mini Check

289

Page 290: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 290/415

2. Read the letter.Lee la carta.

Dear Charly,

I know that you don’t have a computer. I really

enjoy writing letters. Thanks for your letter.

Now let me tell you about my daily life. I wake

up at 6:20 a.m. and take a shower, then I have

breakfast. I don’t have juice or eggs for

breakfast I have some milk and sweet bread,

and then I go to school.

My father takes me to school in his car because

he teaches math at school every morning and

then he goes to work.

I get home at about 2 p.m. and have lunch with

my mother. In the afternoons I go to swim

twice a week and three times a week I play

basketball.

Do you practice sports? Do you have brothers

or sisters?

Regards,

Linda Perry

3. Answer the questions about the letter.Responde las preguntas acerca de la carta.

What’s the letter about? _____________________________________________________________ What time she gets up?

 _____________________________________________________________ What does she have for lunch?

 _____________________________________________________________ Who does she have lunch with?

 _____________________________________________________________ How often he goes swimming?

 _____________________________________________________________ How often does she play basketball?

 _____________________________________________________________ 

290

Page 291: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 291/415

 Think

4. Go back to the letter. Complete the chart.Regresa a la carta. Completa la tabla.

Activities Verbs in simplepresent 3rd

person

Questions Negativestatements

Write

5. Write on the line the word in the box that corresponds.Escribe sobre la línea la palabra del cuadro que corresponda.

watch have go cook

take play listen

do

291

Page 292: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 292/415

  1) He __________ breakfast 2) He __________ to school

3) She __________ the piano 4) He _____________ TV

  5) He __________ his homework 6) She __________ to music

7) She ____________ the bus 8) She ___________ a cake

292

Page 293: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 293/415

Speak Write

6. Work in groups of three. Ask your partners the questions. Write on thechart the answers.

Trabajen en grupos de tres. Pregunta a tus compañeros. Escribe en latabla las respuestas.

Person 1 Person 2 Person 3

Do you go toschool everyday?

Do you havesport class twicea week?Do you cleanyour bedroom onSaturdays?Do you go toswim in winter?

Do you brushyour teeth three

times a day?Do you take ashower once aweek?

Lesson 15

How often do you have English class?

Read

1. Order the letter to form a word.Ordena las letras para formar una palabra.

m/s/l/o/d/e __________________ 

293

Page 294: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 294/415

o/s/e/e/t/i/m/m/s __________________s/u/y/a/l/u/l __________________n/o/e/f/t __________________  

2. Look at Ben’s schedule.Observa el horario de Ben.

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

7:308:20

Spanish Spanish Spanish Spanish Spanish

8:209:10

Technologies Math Social Studies Social Studies History

9:1010:00

History History Technologies Math Math

10:00

10:50

Social Studies Geography Math Technologies Geography

10:5011:10

Recess Recess Recess Recess Recess

11:1012:00

English Physics English Physics English

12:0012:50

Math PhysicalEducation

Physics Geography PhysicalEducation

12:5013:400

TechnologicalEducation

Arts TechnologicalEducation

Arts TechnologicalEducation

3. Answer the questions with the information of Ben’s schedule.

Responde las preguntas con la información del horario de Ben.

How often does Ben have English lessons? ______________________________________________________ How often he has Spanish classes?

 ______________________________________________________ How often does Ben have Math?

 ______________________________________________________ How often does Ben have Physical Education?

 ______________________________________________________ How often does Ben have Arts?

 ______________________________________________________ 

294

Page 295: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 295/415

Think

4. Choose the answer that corresponds.Elige la respuesta que corresponda.

We use ______ to ask the number of times an activity occurs in a period oftime.a) How often do you? b) What time is it?

We use _____ to ask in 3rd person the number of times an activity occurs in aperiod of time.a) How often do you? b) How often does he/she?

Write

5. Look at the chart. Answer the questions.Observa la tabla. Responde las preguntas.

Investigation Report

Play asport

Go tothe

movies

Read abook

WatchTV

Listento

music

Go toparties

Never  1 2 1 2 3

Once a week 1 7 4 1 7

Twice a week 4 1

Three times aweek

1 1

Four times aweek

Five times aweek

2 2 1

Every day 2 3 7 7

Total of interviewed students: 10

295

Page 296: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 296/415

Example:How often do the students play a sport?

One of the students never play a sport; one of the students play a sport

once a week; Four of the students play a sport twice a week; two of thestudents play a sport five times a week and two of them play a sport

everyday.

How often do the students _____________________________ ? _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

How often do the students _____________________________ ? _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

How often do the students _____________________________? _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

How often do the students _____________________________? _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

How often do the students _____________________________?

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

296

Page 297: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 297/415

Speak Write

6. Make your own investigation report about free time activities. Interviewyour classmates. Answer the questionnaire with your classmate’sinformation. Mark on the table your results.

Elabora tu propio reporte de investigación acerca del tiempo libre.Entrevista a tus compañeros. Responde el cuestionario con sus respuestas.Marca en la tabla las repuestas.

Investigation Report

Play asport

Go tothe

movies

Read abook

WatchTV

Listento

music

Go toparties

Never 

Once a week

Twice a week

Three times aweek

Four times aweek

Five times aweek

Every day

Questions:How often do you play a sport?

How often do go to the movies?How often do you read a book?How often do you watch TV?How often do you listen to music?How often do you go to parties?

297

Page 298: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 298/415

Lesson 16

Today is my birthday

Read

1. Complete the information.Completa la información

a) What is this text? b) Who is the e-mail for?an e-mail / an article Nikki / Jessica

c) Who is the recipient?Nikki / Jessica

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

 

  From: [email protected]  To: [email protected]  Subject: Hello, Jess!Dear Jessica,

Hello, Jess. Today is my birthday I always celebrate it with my friends. We usually goto the cinema and then we come to my house. My mother often cooks me a chocolatecake every year and She often makes pizzas for dinner. Sometimes my mother invitesmy grandparents to celebrate my birthday. They never  forget this important day for me. Iam sometimes sad because I miss you.

Write me soon.

Regards,Nikki

298

Page 299: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 299/415

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Today is Nikki’s birthday. T FNikki always celebrates with her friends. T FThey usually go to the theatre. T FNikki’s mother always cooks lemon cake. T FHer family always forgets her birthday. T F

Think

4. Complete the chart.Completa la tabla.

 Always 100%Usually 90%

70%50%

Occasionally 20%Seldom 10%Never 0%

5. Choose the answer that corresponds.Elige la respuesta que corresponde.

We use frequency adverbs ___________.

a) before the verbb) after the verb

With verb to be (am, is, are, etc) frequency adverbs go ___________.

a) before the verb

b) after the verb

299

Page 300: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 300/415

Write

6. Order the words to form a sentence.Ordena las palabras para formar una oración.

Example:Saturdays/ to/ go/ I/ church/ never/ onI never go to church on Saturdays.

eat/ I/ vegetables/ always/. _______________________________________________________ I/ never/ am/ class/ for/ late/.

 _______________________________________________________ cinema/ We/ go/ often/ the/ to/.

 _______________________________________________________ programs/ You/ watch/ usually/ TV/.

 _______________________________________________________ get/ I/ sick/ occasionally/.

 _______________________________________________________ She/ does/ exercise/ sometimes.

 _______________________________________________________ 

Speak Write

7. Work in pairs. Complete the chart with your information. Mark youranswers with a check ().

Trabaja en parejas. Completa la tabla con tu información. Marca tusrespuestas con una palomita (  ).

300

Page 301: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 301/415

Always Usually Often Sometimes Never  Dohomework

Go toschoolGet upearlyPlay soccer

EathamburgersClean yourbedroom

Lesson 17

Does she usually have breakfast at 8 o’clock?

Read

1. Find and circle the days of the week.Encuentra y circula los días de la semana.

Q T W F F T Y S AM T E R B Y R T C

O U D I M A R T RN E N D C D H S YD S E A R U U Z A

A D S Y R F M S D Y A D S R F X U SB Y A A Y D E N R

W A Y Z C T Y D U Y A Y E O H G A HS A T U R D A Y T

301

Page 302: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 302/415

2. Look at Elena’s the time table.Observa la agenda de Elena.

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday

8:00a.m

Breakfast Breakfast Breakfast Breakfast Breakfast

9:00a.m.

Breakfast French Biology Frech Biology French Breakfast

10:00a.m.

SocialStudies

English SocialStudies

English SocialStudies

11:00a.m.

Break Break Break Break Break

11:30

a.m.

Math Math Math Math Math

12:30p.m.

Physics Laboratory Physics Laboratory Physics

1:00p.m.

Dance Theatre Dance Theatre

2:00p.m.

Familylunch

Lunch Lunch Lunch Lunch Lunch

4:00p.m.

Guitar lessons

Guitar lessons

Lunch

6:00

p.m.

Homework Homework Homework Homework Go to

movies

3. Answer the questions with the table’s information.Responde las preguntas con la información de la tabla.

Does Elena usually have breakfast at 8 o’clok? _________________________________________________________Does she usually have breakfast after school?

 _________________________________________________________Does she usually go to the movies on Saturdays?

 _________________________________________________________

Does she always have French lessons at 9 o’clock? _________________________________________________________ Does she always have lunch at 2 o’clock?

 _________________________________________________________

302

Page 303: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 303/415

Think

4. Choose the answers that correspond.Elige las respuestas que correspondan.

For questions beginning with do you…? we answer _________ .a) Yes, I do or Yes/ No, I don’t or Nob) Yes, she/he does or Yes/ No, she doesn’t or No

For questions beginning with does he/she…? we answer _________ .a) Yes, I do or Yes/ No, I don’t or Nob) Yes, she/he does or Yes/ No, she doesn’t or No

Write

5. Order the words to form a question. Answer the question with yourinformation.

Ordena las palabras para formar una pregunta. Responde la pregunta contu información.

Example:Never go to churchDo you never go to church? Yes, I do.

 Always eat vegetables _______________________________________________________ Never get late for class

 _______________________________________________________ Often go to the cinema

 _______________________________________________________ Usually watch TV programs

 _______________________________________________________ Occasionally get sick

 _______________________________________________________ Sometimes do exercise

 _______________________________________________________ 

303

Page 304: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 304/415

Speak Write

6. Ask your partner the next questions and complete the chart. Mark with an

 the answers.Haz a tu compañero las siguientes preguntas y completa la tabla. Marca

con una  las respuestas.

Questions:

Do you usually watch TV in the afternoons?

Do you usually listen to classical music?Do you usually chat on the Internet?Do you usually eat eggs for breakfast?Do you usually go to bed late?Do you usually play soccer?

Activity Never Sometimes Usually Always

Watch TV

Listenclassical

musicChat on theInternetEat eggs forbreakfastGo to bedlatePlay soccer

304

Page 305: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 305/415

Lesson 18

Are you healthy?

Read

eat ________________sleep ________________

do ________________drink ________________walk ________________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Ben: You often look tired, John.Do you usually sleep 8 hours a day?

John: No, I don’t. I rarely go to bed before12 o’clock p.m. and I get up at 5 o’clock

in the morning.Ben: Why, John?John: I always stay up studying.  I’m always worried

about my grades.Ben: Do you eat well?John: Mmm, I usually have hamburgers  for dinner!Ben: I believe you have to change your   routine and eating habits.

3. Answer the questions about the dialogue.Responde las preguntas acerca del diálogo..

Does Ben often look tired? _______________________________________Does John sleep 8 hours a day? __________________________________ Does John usually go home before 12 o’clock? _______________________Does John stay up late because he studies? _________________________

1. Write on the lines the verbs in present simple tense for the third person.Escribe sobre la línea los verbos en presente simple.

305

Page 306: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 306/415

Think

4. Find on the dialogue all the expressions to ask about habits and routines.Encuentra en el diálogo todas las expresiones para preguntar acerca de

hábitos y rutinas.

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

Read Write

5. Read the text and answer the test.Lee el texto y contesta la prueba.

Are you healthy? Answer the questionnaire:  a) always b) usually c) never 

How often do you eat vegetables? a b c

How often do you eat fruits? a b c

How often do you eat fish? a b c

How often do you eat meat? a b c

Do you drink more than 2 litters of water a day? a b c

Do you sleep 8 hours a day? a b c

How often do you exercise for more than an hour? a b c

Do you eat fast food? a b c

Do you watch TV for more than 2 hours? a b c

Do you use the stairs instead of the elevator? a b c

Do you go on a diet? a b c

306

Page 307: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 307/415

Are you healthy?

Get your score: 

Mostly a’s: You are always taking care of your health but do

not exaggerate. Take a breath and relax. Take care with the

diet you follow, remember that you are growing up.

Mostly b’s: You are a healthy person. You know there’s a time

for everything and you also control your nutrition. Keep going

that way and be healthy now and in the future.

Mostly c’s: You are not very healthy. You enjoy doing nothing

and eating junk food. You never worry about your health. Try todo more physical activities and control your eating habits. You

realy need to do something.

Speak Write

6. Work in small groups. Compare your score with your classmates and giveadvices.

Trabaja en pequeños grupos. Compara tu puntuación con tus compañerosy dense consejos.

Example:I usually eat fruits and vegetables.He always eats fruits and vegetables.

307

Page 308: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 308/415

Lesson 19

Sending an e-mail

Read

1. Choose the answer that corresponds.Elige la respuesta que corresponda.

Who is the writer?a) Noel b) Elizabeth

Who is the recipient?a) Noel b) Elizabeth

2. Read the e-mail.Lee el correo electrónico.

 

  From: [email protected]  To: [email protected]  Subject: Hello!Dear Elizabeth,

Thanks for your last e-mail. Let me tell you more about my lifestyle here in Mexico. Iwake up at 6:30 a.m. and take a shower, then I get dressed and have breakfast. After that I take the bus at 7:20 a.m. to get to school at about quarter to eight.

I have classes from eight to ten thirty. Next I have a break. After that I go back toclasses until 2 o’clock.

When I get back home I have lunch with my mother and then I do my homework. After that I watch TV and later I get ready to go to bed at about 9 o’clock.

Write me soon.

Regards,Noel

308

Page 309: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 309/415

3. Answer the questions about the e-mail.Responde las preguntas acerca del correo electrónico.

What’s the e-mail about? ____________________________________________________________What time Noel gets up? _______________________________________Does he take a shower after breakfast? ____________________________ Does Noel watch TV after doing his homework? _____________________What time Noel go to bed? ______________________________________ 

Think

4. Choose the answer that corresponds.Elige la respuesta que corresponda.

We use later, then, after that and next  to make:a) time referencesb) habits and routines

5. Look at the underlined words. Answer the questions.Observa las palabras subrayadas. Responde las preguntas.

What do they mean? Are they the same? _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

Write

6. Order the sentences. Write on the line the number that corresponds.Ordena los enunciados. Escribe sobre la línea el número que corres-

 ponde.

309

Page 310: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 310/415

Visit my grandparents (4:00 p.m.) ______

Wake up (8:30 a.m.) 1__ 

Have lunch (2:30 – 3:00 p.m.) ______

Have breakfast (9:30 – 10 00 a.m.) ______

Get up (9:00 a.m.) ______

Take a shower (11:30 – 11:50 a.m.) ______

310

Page 311: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 311/415

Watch TV (6:00 – 7:00 p.m.) ______

Play soccer (10:30 – 11:30 a.m.) ______

Go to bed (10:00 p.m.) _______

7. Answer the e-mail to Noel. Use the sentences in exercise six and thesequencers (then, next, after that  and later).  Responde el correo electrónico a Noel. Usa los enunciados del ejercicioseis y usa (then, next, after that  y later).

 

  From:To: [email protected]  Subject:Dear Noel,

Regards, _______________________

311

Page 312: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 312/415

Lesson 20

Crocodiles are endangered species

Read

1. Complete the letters to form a word.Completa las letras para formar una palabra

G ___ ___ ___ ___ f e(a/r/f/i)

E ___ ___ p ___ ___ ___ t(e/n/l/h/a)

K ___ ___ g ___ r ___ ___ (o/a/o/n/a)

H ___ m ___ ___ ___ g b ___ ___ ___ 

(n/i/m/i/r/u/d)

312

Page 313: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 313/415

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

Crocodiles are reptiles

Crocodiles are reptiles. They are considered anendangered species, in all parts of its North,Central, and South American range. Investigationreports say that in the United States, is almostnonexistent. Illegal hunting and habitat depletionhas reduced populations of this reptile to criticallevels.

Most of them are found in southern Mexico, Central America, the Caribbean, and northern South America. Their habitat is the fresh or salty water ofrivers and lagoons.

Crocodile is a prehistoric-looking creature, it is distinguished by its longer,thinner nose, its light color, and it has two long teeth on the lower jaw that arevisible when it closes his mouth.

Its size is about 4 to 6 meters of length. Their diet consists of small mammals,birds, fish, crabs, insects, snails, frogs, and occasionally carrion.

3. Complete the table with the information about the crocodiles.Completa la tabla con la información acerca de los cocodrilos.

Type

Habitat

PhysicalcharacteristicsDiet

Size

313

Page 314: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 314/415

Think

4. Circle in the text the words are similar in Spanish (cognates). Write themon the lines.

Encierra en el texto las palabras que son similares en español (cognados).Escríbelas sobre las líneas.

Crocodiles _ _________________ _________________ _______________ _________________ _________________ _______________ _________________ _________________ _______________ _________________ _________________  _______________ _________________ _________________   _________________

Write

5. Complete the information about different animals.Completa la información acerca de diferentes animales.

Animal Type Diet Habitat Origin

Lion Mammal Animals

Whale

Panda China

Butterfly Tropical rainforest

Snake Reptile Insects,animals

Speak Write

6. Work in pairs. Share your answers with your partner.Trabaja en parejas. Comparte tus respuestas con tus compañeros.

314

Page 315: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 315/415

Lesson 21

Elephants live in Africa

Read

1. Show what you now about animals. Write True or False.Muestra lo que sabes de animales. Escribe verdadero o falso.

Lions are hunters. __________Whales live in the ocean. __________

Parrots can swim. __________Cows eat grass. __________Mice love cats. __________

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

Elephant, a heavy animal!

Elephant is considered a mammal. It  is an endangeredspecie. It is found in African Savannah. Elephant is colouredgray and is a very big animal. It has long trunks. It uses itstrunk to take showers, to carry things and to eat. It is anextension of his lips and nose. It is used to drink water, drytheir bodies, lift and hold things. The most important functionof its trunk is to gather food and bring it to his mouth. It is avery heavy animal. It weights 12, 000 kilograms. It lives 60years approximately. It drinks between 30 and 50 gallons ofwater a day. Elephant eats grass, leaves, fruits and seeds.

315

Page 316: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 316/415

3. Answer the questions about the text.Responde las preguntas acerca del texto.

Where does the elephant live? ________________________________ 

What’s its principal characteristic? _____________________________ Does it eat meat? __________________________________________ Is it heavy? _______________________________________________ What do you find most interesting about elephants?

 _________________________________________________________

Think

4. Look at the words in bold. Answer the questions.Observa las palabras en negritas. Responde las preguntas.

In line 1 the word it refers to:

a) Africab) elephantc) the text

In line 3 the word it refers to:

a) elephantb) Africac) The text

In line 5 the word it refers to:

a) trunkb) elephantc) Africa

We use ______ to refer to animals and objects.

a) heb) shec) it

316

Page 317: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 317/415

Write

5. Complete the sentences with the words in the box. Words can be usedmore than once.

Completa los enunciados con las palabras del cuadro. Las palabras pueden ser usadas más de una vez.

Chimpanzee is an ape. _____ lives in central Africa.

Mauricio loves spiders. _____ isn’t afraid of them.

he she it they

Seahorse lives in the ocean. ______ is a type of fish.

Octopus has 8 tentacles. ______ eat small animals.

Chami is a panda. _____ lives in China and eats bamboo; _____ is its principal food.

The forest is the house of bears. ______is full of vegetation.

Rose has a cat. _____ takes care of him.

317

Page 318: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 318/415

Lesson 22

Do Bengal tigers live in the forest?

Read

1. Remember your geography classes. Answer the question.Recuerda tus clases de geografía. Responde la pregunta.

Where is located India? _______________________________________________________ 

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Tim: Do you know Bengal tigers?Jorge: Yes, I do, but not too much.  I have just seen them in pictures.  Does Bengal tiger love meat?Tim: Yes, it does. They are carnivores.Jorge: Does it live in the desert?Tim: No. It doesn’t live in the desert, they live in the forest.

Jorge: Please let me know more about them.Tim: Let’s read this article about Bengal tigers  together.

318

Page 319: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 319/415

India, the house of the Bengal tiger

It lives in the topical forest of India. It is orange-brown with black stripes.

Bengal tigers are usually solitary, they occasionally travel in groups. Theylive around 10 to 12 yeas. Bengal tiger in captivity can live up to 30 years.

They are pure carnivores and hunters. Bengal Tigers prefer to hunt mostlyby night, but are awake in the daytime. Their color gives the tiger excellentcamouflage. Tigers kill prey by a suffocation bite of the neck and then theyusually drag its kill to a safe place to eat. Bengal Tigers can climb treeseffectively. Bengal Tigers are also strong and frequent swimmers, oftenattack drinking or swimming prey. The Bengal Tiger can consume up toabout 30.00 kg of meat at a time and then go without eating for days.These tigers normally hunt deer or anything above 45 kilograms, but whenthey are very hungry they eat frogs, crocodiles, and sometimes humans.

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Tim is talking with Ben. T FThey are talking about Bengal tigers. T FBengal tiger lives in India. T FBengal tiger can live more than 30 years. T FThey can camouflage because of its size. T FThey can climb trees. T FBengal tiger eats 30 kg of meat. T F

319

Page 320: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 320/415

Think

4. Look back to the dialogue. Choose the answer that corresponds.Regresa al diálogo. Elige la respuesta que corresponda.

When we use does to make questions, we:a) the verb ending doesn’t changeb) the verb ending changes

When we give short answers or make negative statements with does, we:a) the verb ending doesn’t changeb) the verb ending changes

Write

5. Write on the line do or does.Escribe sobre la línea do o does.

 ________ you play tenis? Yes, I do. ________ Moncho mouse like chees? No, he doesn’t. ________ you like hot weather? No, I don’t. ________ she like insects? Yes, she does. ________ your sister live in USA? No, she doesn’t.

6. Work in pairs. Write five different questions using does about Bengaltigers. Ask your partner your questions and write the answers

Escribe cinco diferentes preguntas usando does acerca de los tigres deBengala. Hazle a tu compañero las preguntas y escribe las respuestas.

Questions Answers

1.2.3.4.5.

320

Page 321: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 321/415

Lesson 23

Where do grey whales travel in the winter?

Read

1. Choose the option that is wrong.Elige la respuesta incorrecta.

The vampire bat don’t live in Central America. It is blind an lives in humid and dark caves.a) b) c) d)

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

BIG TRIP

Grey whales migrate from the cold waters of the Artic to thewarm bays of Baja California. They migrate in the winter. Theystart their trip in October. It takes between 5 and 8 weeks to getto Magdalena Bay and San Ignacio Lagoons. They use thisspace to procreate and take care of their babies. The femalessuckle the babies until they are ready to leave. They remain

there from December to April. Because of the hunt chase Greywhales became an endangered species in 1946 and Mexicanauthorities prohibited the hunting in the lagoons. Now a daysGrey whale is not considered in danger.

321

Page 322: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 322/415

3. Circle T if the sentence is True or F if it is False.Encierra en un círculo la letra T si el enunciado es verdadero o la F si es

falso.

Gray whales live in the Tropic. T FThey travel in the winter. T FThey start their trip in September. T FThey stay in Baja California Bays. T FNow a day they are an endangered species. T F

Think

4. Go back to the text. Choose the answer that corresponds.Regresa al texto. Elige la respuesta que corresponde.

In line 2 the word they refers to:a) the Articb) grey whalesc) lagoons

In line 4 the word they refers to:a) grey whalesb) oceanc) lagoons

In line 6 the word they refers to:a) oceanb) grey whalesc) lagoons

We use ______ to refer to plurals for women, men, animals and objects.a) itb) theyc) she

We use wh- questions to ask about:a) lifestyleb) colorsc) verbs

322

Page 323: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 323/415

Write

5. Work in pairs. Read each sentence about an animal. Form a question foreach statement. Guess what animal is.

Trabaja en parejas. Lee cada enunciado y formula preguntas acerca de unanimal. Adivina qué animal es.

Questions Answers What am I?

Where do they live? They live in the ocean.

They are a type of fish.

They are the only speciethat the male getspregnant.They are found in tropicaland temperate waters.

They eat plankton,shrimps and crustaceans.

They are unusualbecause of its equineshape.

Questions Answers What am I?

  They are marsupials.

They are fat and hairy,most of them are gray.

They are found in Australia.They do not drink muchwater.

They sleep 18 hours per

day.What do they eat?

Where do they live?

They eat and live ineucalyptus trees.

323

Page 324: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 324/415

Speak Write

6. Share with other classmates your questions and your conclusions aboutthe animal you think it is.

Comparte con otros compañeros tus preguntas y conclusiones acerca delanimal que ustedes piensan que es.

Lesson 24

Read

1. Write on the line the missing words.Escribe en la línea las palabras que faltan.

0 % 50 % 75 % 85 % 100%

never ____________ _____________ _____________ always

sometimes usually often

Mini Check

324

Page 325: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 325/415

2. Read the text.Lee el texto.

I always wake up at 5:00 o’clock. I take a shower, then I takebreakfast and after that I get ready to go to work. Then I go to the

restaurant at 7:00 o’clock. I often go to the market and buyvegetables, fruits, meat and everything I need to cook. When Icome back to the restaurant I set the day menu and giveinstructions to the cooks. I change the menu every day. After thatwe start cooking. At 2:00 o’clock people usually arrives for lunch.When we finish serving approximately at 5:00 o’clock the cooksstart cleaning the area and I get ready to leave. Then when I gethome I usually take a walk with Penny, that’s my dog. It is a Frenchpoodle. He is always waiting for me. Later I get ready to go to bed.

3. Answer the questions about the text.Responde las preguntas acerca del texto.

How often he wakes up at 5:00 o’clock? _____________________________________________________________ Does he usually take a shower before breakfast?

 _____________________________________________________________ What time does he get to the restaurant?

 _____________________________________________________________ Does he usually go to the market?

 _____________________________________________________________ What does he do at the restaurant?

 _____________________________________________________________ How often he takes a walk with Penny?

 _____________________________________________________________ Does Penny is a dog?

 _____________________________________________________________ 

325

Page 326: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 326/415

 Think

4. Look at the text. Complete the table.O exto. Completa la tabla.

Frequencyadverbs

Pronouns Verbs in Sequencers

bserva el t 

present simple

Write

5. Order the words to form a question. Answer them with true information.formar una pregunta. Respóndelas con

ur/ ?

4. your/ Where/ do/ grandparents/ live/ ? _______________________________ ________________________ 

Ordena las palabras parainformación verdadera.

1. eat/ What/ your/ pet/does/? _______________________________ ________________________ 

2. often/ to/ you/ parties/ go/ How/ do/ ? _______________________________ ________________________ 

3. you/ usually/ Do/ celebrate/ birthday/ yo _______________________________ ________________________ 

326

Page 327: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 327/415

5. vegetables/ eat/ you/ Do/ regularly/ ? _______________________________ ________________________ 

6. Write the true sentences about yourself. Use frequency adverbs.Escribe enunciados verdaderos acerca de ti. Usa adverbios de frecuencia.

I ______________ get up late to go to school.I ______________ get up early every weekend.I ______________ take a shower at night.I ______________ read the newspaper.I ______________ watch romantic movies.I ______________ listen to rock music.I ______________ swim in the winter.I ______________ play with my friends.

Lesson 25

Project: Come and visit our school zoo. Part one

Read

1. A project work is to help students to build up their English vocabulary. It

has to collect all the words they can find outside the classroom.Un proyecto de trabajo sirve para que los estudiantes construyan su

vocabulario en inglés. Éste debe ayudar a recopilar palabras que se usanfuera del salón de clases.

2. A project work is used to describe activities done in the classroom whichasks the students to use their general knowledge and information to dosomething and to find out information and to present it to the class.

Un proyecto es utilizado para describir actividades hechas dentro delsalón de clases en el cual se invita al estudiante a usar sus conocimientos einformación para hacer algo y presentarlo frente a la clase.

3. Discuss with your classmates about what animals would you like topresent in your zoo.

Discute con tus compañeros acerca de qué animales les gustaría presentar en su zoológico.

327

Page 328: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 328/415

4. Work in pairs. Choose an animal you like.Trabaja en parejas. Elige un animal que te guste.

5. Look at the table.Observa la tabla.

  Brochures The animal that live in your zoo.

  Information about the animals Lay out with the relevant informationabout an animal.

  Invitation Why don’t you come to our zooschool?

  Presentation Exhibition of the zoo.

6. Gather information about the animal you choose.

Recopila información acerca del animal que elegiste.

Lesson 26

Project: Come and visit our school zoo. Part two

Read

Make a brochure or advertisement.Produce un folleto o anuncio

1. Prewriting. Antes de escribir.

  Choose a topic.  Gather specific details.

2. Writing.Escribiendo.

  Get a sheet of paper.  Divide the sheet in three parts of the same size.  Fold the sheet.  Write specific details (example: gorilla- is an animal similar to human, it is

a mammal, etc.).

328

Page 329: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 329/415

  Mark with bold, underlined, etc. the important words.  Illustrate your brochure.

3. Revising.Revisando.

  Read your draft to your partner.  Let your partner read the draft.

o  To verify the details are important.  Correct and edit.

o  Did I capitalize the first letter of the proper nouns?o  Did I begin titles and initials with capital letters?o  Did I misspell some words? Look for the correct spelling in a

dictionary.

4. Publishing.Publicando.

  Glue or draw the images of your subject on the folded sheet  Share your brochure with your classmate (you can photocopy your

brochure and distribute it in your school).

  Paste the brochure on the windows or in the bulletin board.

329

Page 330: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 330/415

Lesson 27

Project: Come and visit our school zoo. Part three

Read

Make a layout.Elabora un formato.

1. Prewriting. Antes de escribir .

  Gather specific details about the animal you have chosen.

2. Writing.Escribiendo.

  Get a sheet of paper or construction paper.  Draw a layout.

Type

Origin

Habitat

PhysicalcharacteristicsDiet

Size

Endangeredspecie

330

Page 331: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 331/415

  Complete the layout with the information you gathered.  Write the most information try to be short and specific.  Think about an illustration and make a layout of it.

3. Revising.Revisando.

  Read your draft to your partner.  Let your partner read the draft.

o  To verify the information you include is important.  Correct and edit.

o  Did I capitalize the first letter of the proper nouns?o  Did I begin titles and initials with capital letters?o  Did I misspell some words? Look for the correct spelling in a

dictionary.

4. Publishing.Publicando.

  Work in the playground.  Get chalks or pencils different colors and construction paper.  Make a picture of the animal you choose.  The picture of the animal must be big size.  Be creative when you make your picture.  Use different materials for example recyclable.  Write the information of the animal.

He lives in the ocean. He eats smallshrimps…..

331

Page 332: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 332/415

Lesson 28

Project: Come and visit our school zoo. Part four

Read

Design an invitation to the zoo.Diseña una invitación para ir al zoológico.

1. Prewriting. Antes de escribir.

  Gather specific details.

2. Writing.Escribiendo.

  Write a draft.  Write the most information try to be short and specific.  Think about an illustration and make a layout of it.

Example:

Come to visit our ZOO

Just for TODAYKnow the animals you’d never

imagine!

Come andlearneverything

about animals!

332

Page 333: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 333/415

3. Revising.Revisando.

  Read your draft to your partner.  Let your partner read the draft.

o  To verify the information you include is important.  Correct and edit.

o  Did I capitalize the first letter of the proper nouns?o  Did I begin titles and initials with capital letters?o  Did I misspell some words? Look for the correct spelling in a

dictionary.

4. Publishing.

Publicando.

  Make enough copies so that everyone can have one.  Publish your invitation.  Make enough copies to the people that are coming to the zoo.  Organize the visit to the zoo.  Receive people in your zoo.

333

Page 334: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 334/415

Review. Part one

Write

1. Choose the letter that corresponds to each clock.Elige la letra que corresponde a cada reloj.

What time is it?

Lesson 29

( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

a) It’s a quarter to eight.It’s seven forty five.

b) It’s three o’clock.

c) It’s six past six.It’s six six.

d) It’s half past eight.It’s eight thirty.

e) It’s half past five.

It’s five thirty.

f) It’s nine past twelve.

It’s twelve nine.

g) It’s five to eleven.It’s ten fifty five.

h) It’s a quarter past six.It’s six fifteen.

334

Page 335: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 335/415

2. Circle the option that corresponds to the image.Encierra en un círculo la opción que corresponde a la imagen.

1) What does she do?a) washes her hands. b) She cooks.

2) What does he do?a) He takes a shower. b) He goes to work.

3) What does he do?a) He reads newspaper. b) He eats breakfast.

4) What does she do?a) She comes back home b) She reads a book.

5) What does he do?a) He watches T.V. b) He goes to bed.

335

Page 336: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 336/415

3. Complete the chart. Use the words in the box.Completa la tabla. Usa las palabras del cuadro.

have get take do come

go play have help have

go cook watch

Hello I’m Juan. I _______ up at sixo’clock in themorning fromMonday to Friday.

I _____________ashower at sixfifteen.

Then, I _________ breakfast at seveno’clock.

I ______ to schoolat half past seven.

I _________  soccer in therecess.

I __________ backhome at half pasttwo.

I _____________ ameal at threeo’clock.

I ___________myhomework attwenty past four.

I _________ T.V athalf past six.

I __________ mymother to

 __________  dinnerat half past seven

My family and I __________ dinnerat eight o’clock.

I ____________ tobed at nine thirty.

336

Page 337: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 337/415

4. Look at the chart and complete the information.Observa la tabla y completa la información.

MOVIE GUIDE

I love to hate you Max the mouseFrance, 2007 USA, 2007Drama CartoonClassification: B Classification: A6:15 p.m., 8:00 p.m. 4:40 p.m., 6:10 p.m.

Funny little frog You’re the one for meFrance, 2006 England, 2005Comedy RomanceClassification: A Classification: B

5:30 p.m., 6:45 p.m. 7:30 p.m., 8:55 p.m.

Take it or leave it Zapata, the true storyUSA, 2007 Mexico, 2007

 Action DocumentaryClassification: B Classification: A5:40 .m. 7:25 .m. 6:30 .m.

Name Genre Classification Country TimeI love to hateyou

Comedy

B

USA

7:30 p.m., 8:55p.m.

337

Page 338: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 338/415

5. Write on the line the missing words.Escribe sobre la línea las palabras faltantes.

 ___ the _____________ ____ the afternoon _____ the ____________/ ____ night

6. Complete the chart. Use the words on the box.Completa la tabla. Usa las palabras del cuadro.

my teeth a shower to school breakfast dressed

up dinner to the park to bed

to church my mother’s car English lessons

Go

Get

Have

Walk

Wash

Take

338

Page 339: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 339/415

Lesson 30

Review. Part two

Write

1. Complete the text with the verbs in the box. Write the verbs in the form thatcorresponds.

Completa el texto con los verbos del cuadro. Escribe los verbos en la for-ma que corresponda.

take get up do start eat

have get go take have

Jennifer Gomez has a very busy day. She _____________ at 7:30 a.m.

then she __________ a shower. After that she ____________dressed

then she __________ breakfast. At 8:30 a.m. she _____________to

work. She ____________ a secretary. She ____________ calling her

boss to remind him about an appointment at 9:30 a.m. with a

transnational company. She ____________ lunch at 2:00 o’clock. Latershe goes back home. At 7:00 p.m. she _____________ aerobics. Then

she ____________ a bath and then goes to bed.

2. Look at the chart. Complete the information.Observa la tabla. Completa la información.

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday

Susan Get upearly

Get upearly

Get upearly

Get upearly

Get upearly

Cleanher room

Go to visit hergrandparents

Peter Watch TV Read abook

Listen tomusic

Go to themovies

Visitfriends

WatchTV

Clean thehouse

339

Page 340: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 340/415

Susan _____________________________________from Monday to Friday.Peter ______________________________________ on Monday.Susan ____________________________________________ on Saturdays.

Peter ______________________________________ on Tuesdays.Susan _____________________________________________ on Sundays.Peter ______________________________________ on Wednesday.Susan doesn’t ______________________________________ on Saturdays.Peter ______________________________________ on Thursdays.Peter doesn’t _______________________________________ on Saturday.Peter and Susan don’t ________________________________  on Tuesday.

3. Complete the sentences with do or does.  Completa los enunciados con do o does.

 __________ you like classic music? Yes I ___________ .Luis _____________ not like vegetables.Mary ____________ not speak French.I _____________ not go to parties. I ___________ not like dancing.

 ____________ you do exercise? Yes, I ____________ . ______________ Laura love English lessons? Yes, she _______________ .

4. Complete the sentences with the prepositions in, on or at.  Completa los enunciados con las preposociones in, on o at.

I often do exercise _____ the morning.I usually have an apple for breakfast ____ 7:00 o’clock.I never go to parties ____ Tuesday.I like to watch TV ____ night.She goes to school ____ Saturdays.

5. Complete the sentences with your information.Completa los enunciados con tu información.

I always ____________________________________________________.I usually ____________________________________________________.I often ______________________________________________________.I sometimes _________________________________________________.I never _____________________________________________________.

340

Page 341: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 341/415

6. Write the questions to the following answers.Escribe las preguntas para las siguientes respuestas.

 __________________________________________________ ?I always brush my teeth.

 __________________________________________________ ?They live in the ocean.

 __________________________________________________ ?I usually eat eggs for breakfast.

 __________________________________________________ ?No, I don’t. I’m afraid of water.

 __________________________________________________ ?Lucy likes to eat vegetables and fruits.

 __________________________________________________ ?Mario never eats fish.

 __________________________________________________ ?The Bengal tiger lives in India.

7. Write a paragraph about someone you know.Escribe un párrafo acerca de una persona que conozcas.

 _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________

341

Page 342: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 342/415

Answer key/Respuestas

Lesson 7:

1.Quarter past ten 10:15Half past two 2:30Four fifty six 4:56

3.Jessica is happy about speaking with Nikki. TNikki starts school at nine 8 o’clock in the afternoon. FNikki does homework at night. FOn Saturdays, Nikki goes to visit her grandparents. TOn Saturdays, Jessica goes to visit her grandparents. T

4.At … On … In …

8 o’clock Saturdays The morningThree or three trirty weekends The afternoonHalf past eight

5.What time is it now?What time do you ….?

6.It’s five past seven.It’s five to seven. In the morning.

It’s twenty past four. In the afternoonIt’s twenty to four.

342

Mini Check

Page/ página 264

Page/página 265

Pages/páginas 266-267

Page 343: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 343/415

It’s half past eight. In the eveningIt’s half to eight.

It’s thirty five past ten. In the morningIt’s thirty five to ten.

It’s quarter past nine.It’s quarter to ten. In the morning

Lesson 14

1.a) Who’s the writer? Linda Perryb) Who’s the recipient? Charly

4.Activities Verbs in simple

present 3rdperson

Questions Negativestatements

wake up Takes do you practicesports?

you don’t have acomputer 

take a shower Teaches do you have

brothers orsisters?

I don’t have juice

or eggs

have breakfastgo to schoolgo to swimplay basketball

5.

  1) He has breakfast 2) He goes to school

3) She plays the piano 4) He watches TV  5) He does his homework 6) She listens to music7) She takes the bus 8) She cooks a cake

343

Page/página 289

Page/ página 291

Page/página 292

Mini Check

Page 344: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 344/415

Lesson 24

1.0 % 50 % 75 % 85 % 100%never sometimes often usually always

4.Frequency

adverbsPronouns Verbs in

present simpleSequencers

 Always I wake up Thenusually It take a shower After that

Often He get ready Later  go tobuysetgivechangestartarrivefinishtake a walk

5.1. eat/ What/ your/ pet/does/?What does your pet eat?

2. often/ to/ you/ parties/ go/ How/ do/ ?How often do you go to parties?

3. you/ usually/ Do/ celebrate/ birthday/ your/ ?Do you usually celebrate your birthday?

4. your/ Where/ do/ grandparents/ live/ ?Where do your grandparents live?

5. vegetables/ eat/ you/ Do/ regularly/ ?Do you eat vegetables regularly?

344

Mini Check

Page/página 324

Page/página 326

Page/página 326-327

Page 345: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 345/415

ReviewLesson 29

1.What time is it?

( b ) ( a ) ( h ) ( f )

( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( d ) ( c ) ( g ) ( e )

2.

1) What does she do?

a) washes her hands.

2) What does he do?a) He takes a shower.

3) What does he do?b) He eats breakfast.

4) What does she do?b) She reads a book.

5) What does he do?a) He watches T.V.

345

Page/página 334

Page/página 335

Page 346: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 346/415

3.

Hello I’m Juan. Iget up at sixo’clock in themorning fromMonday to Friday.

I take a shower atsix fifteen.

Then, I havebreakfast at seveno’clock.

I go to school athalf past seven.

I play soccer in thecess.re

I come back homet half past two.a

I have a meal atree o’clock.th

I do my homeworkat twenty past four.

I I go to bed at nine

thirty.

watch T.V at half

ast six.p

helpI my mother to

cook dinner at halfpast seven

My family and I

have dinner ateight o’clock.

346

Page/página 336

Page 347: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 347/415

4.Name Genre Classification Country Time

I love to hateyou

Drama B France 6:15 p.m.,8:00 p.m.

Funny littlefrog

Comedy A France 5:30 p.m.,6:45 p.m.

Take it orleave it

 Action B USA 5:40 p.m. 7:25p.m.

Max themouse

Cartoon A USA 4:40 p.m.,6:10 p.m.

You’re the onefor me

Romance B England 7:30 p.m.,8:55 p.m.

Zapata, thetrue story

Documentary A Mexico 6:30 p.m.

5.

in the afternoonin the morning in the evening/ at night

6.Go to church, to bed, to schoolGet dressed, upHave breakfast, dinner  Walk to school, to the parkWash my teeth, my mother’s carTake a shower, English lessons

ReviewLesson 30

1.Jennifer Gomez has a very busy day. She gets up at 7:30 a.m. then shetakes a shower. After that she gets dressed then she has breakfast. At 8:30a.m. she goes to work. She is a secretary. She starts calling her boss toremind him about an appointment at 9:30 a.m. with a transnational company.She eats lunch at 2:00 o’clock. Later she goes back home. At 7:00 p.m. shedoes aerobics. Then she takes a bath and then goes to bed.

347

Page/página 337

Page/página 338

Page/página 339

Page 348: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 348/415

2.Susan gets up early from Monday to Friday.Peter watches TV on Monday.

Susan cleans her room on Saturdays.Peter reads a book on Tuesdays.Susan goes to visit her grandparents on Sundays.Peter listens to music on Wednesday.Susan doesn’t get up early, go to visit her grandparents on Saturdays.Peter goes to the movies on Thursdays.Peter doesn’t visit friends, read a book, etc. on Saturday.Peter and Susan don’t watch TV, clean the house, etc. on Tuesday.

3.Do you like classic music? Yes I do.Luis does not like vegetables.Mary does not speak French.I do not go to parties. I do not like dancing.Do you do exercise? Yes, I do.Does Laura love English lessons? Yes, she does.

4.I often do exercise in the morning.I usually have an apple for breakfast at 7:00 o’clock.I never go to parties on Tuesday.I like to watch TV at night.She goes to school on Saturdays.

6.How often do you brush your teeth?

Where do they live?

What do you eat for breakfast?

Do you like to swim?

What does Lucy like to eat?

How often does Mario eat fish?

Where does the Bengal tiger live?

348

Page/página 340

Page/página 341

Page 349: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 349/415

Materiales de apoyo

Temas Material sugeridoPuedes consultar estas páginasa lo largo de toda la unidad 4.

www. bbc.co.uk www.afterschool.gov www.epals.com www.kidsplanet.org  www.animaland.org  Programa Enciclomedia para

Telesecundaria.

Bibliografía

 Amieva, M., et. al., English 1, México, Santillana, 2006.

Celorio, G., Smash! 1, Teacher´s Resource Book,  México, Richmond

Publishing, 1997.

Domínguez, E., et al ., Connections one. Student´s Book,  México, Nuevo

México, 2006.

Emilsson, E., et al ., Dialogues. English 1, México, Fondo de Cultura

Económica, 2002.

Luna, M., et. al ., Explore 1, Teacher’s guide, México, Macmillan Heinemann,

2002.

Philip, H., et al ., A Crossroads, México, Oxford, 2006.

Programas de Estudio. Educación básica. Secundaria. Lengua extranjera

Inglés,  México, SEP, 2006.

349

Page 350: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 350/415

Page 351: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 351/415

Unit 5Places and buildings/Lugares y edificios

INGLÉS I

Page 352: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 352/415

Page 353: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 353/415

Unit 5

Places and buildings/Lugares y edificios

Purpose/Propósito

El propósito de esta unidad es capacitar a los estudiantes a describir el lugarde donde ellos u otras personas viven, y cómo pedir y dar direcciones.

Topics/Temas 

Lesson 1 Welcome to PueblaLesson 2 I’m looking for a greengrocer  Lesson 3 A brochure with interesting placesLesson 4 Is there a bank near here?Lesson 5 Where is the bank?Lesson 6 This is a map of my townLesson 7 Mini CheckLesson 8 The park is on Allende StreetLesson 9 Look at the mapLesson 10 Go straight, turn left, turn rightLesson 11 Welcome to my schoolLesson 12 How can I get to the gas station?Lesson 13 How can I get to The Palace of Fine Arts?Lesson 14 Mini CheckLesson 15 How can I get to your house?Lesson 16 Project: A travel brochure. Part oneLesson 17 Project: A travel brochure. Part twoLesson 18 Project: A travel brochure. Part threeLesson 19 Project: A travel brochure. Part fourLesson 20 Project: A travel brochure. Part fiveLesson 21 Review21 sessions, 7 weeks/ 21 sesiones, 7 semanas 

353

Page 354: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 354/415

Welcome to Puebla

Read

1. Write the place of the city where are located these zoos.Escribe el nombre de la ciudad donde se ubican estos zoológicos.

2. Read the dialogue and circle the cognates.Lee el diálogo y encierra los cognados.

Lesson 1

 _______________________  _________________________ 

 Lorena: Hello. I’m Lorena. What’s your name?Martha: Hello. I’m Martha. Nice too meet you.Lorena: Nice to meet you too. Are you new in the town?Martha: Yes, I moved with my family last week.Lorena: Welcome to Puebla. Where are you from?Martha: I’m from Mexico City.Lorena: Oh! It’s very close to here, but I’ve never visited it. What does it look

like?Martha: It’s a beautiful and big place. It has many malls, museums, markets,

theatres, parks, supermarkets and more. And what about Puebla?Lorena: Well, it’s small City, but it has a big mall, a beautiful cathedral, many

churches and a very famous zoo where the animals live free. It iscalled Safari.

Martha: Mexico City also has a famous zoo. It is called Chapultepec.

354

Page 355: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 355/415

Write

3. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

a) Where’s Martha from? _____________________________________________________________ 

b) Where’s Lorena from? _____________________________________________________________ 

c) What does Puebla look like? _____________________________________________________________ 

d) What does Mexico City look like? ________________________________ 

e) Where’s Safari zoo? __________________________________________

f) Where’s Chapultepec zoo? _____________________________________ 

355

Page 356: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 356/415

Think

4. Circle the answer that corresponds.Circula la respuesta que corresponda.

 A) This words are similar in two different languages and their meaning is thesame.

a) verbs b) cognates c) numbers

Write

5. Answer the questions with your information.Contesta las preguntas con tu información.

a) What’s your name? __________________________________________

b) Where are you from? _________________________________________ 

c) What’s the name of your town? _________________________________ 

d) What does it look like? ________________________________________

e) Do you like it? ___________________________________________Why?

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________

356

Page 357: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 357/415

6. Draw the place where you live and describe it.Dibuja el lugar donde vives y descríbelo.

 _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________.

I’m looking for a greengrocer

Read

1. Look at the pictures and complete the sentence.Observa los dibujos y completa el enunciado.

a) It is the place where you can buy vegetables and fruits. _______________

 A sweet store A pharmacy A greengrocer

Lesson 2

 ________________________________ 

357

Page 358: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 358/415

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Lorena: Hi, Martha. Where are you going?

Martha: I’m looking for a greengrocer, my mom needs some tomatoes. Canyou tell where can I find one?Lorena: Yes, of course. There’s a greengrocer next to the post office. I have  an idea, I’m going to show you some of the stores in the town.Martha: That’s a good idea.Lorena: Look, over there is an office supply and a sweet store. If you don’t

have a computer there is an Internet cafe. Also there is a library  between the market and the bank.Martha: Is there a book store near here?Lorena: Yes, there is one next to the pharmacy. Also there is a big hospital.Martha: Yes, I know. My father works there. He’s a doctor.

Write

3. Write True or False.

Escribe True (verdadero) o False (falso)

a) Lorena is looking for a greengrocer. ________________b) Martha’s mother needs some tomatoes. ________________c) The greengrocer is next to the post office. ________________d) Lorena’s father is a doctor. ________________e) Lorena helps Martha to find a greengrocer. ________________

358

Page 359: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 359/415

Think

4. Complete the sentences.Completa los enunciados.

a) We use the article __________ with the next word begins with a vowel  sound.b) We use the article __________ when the next word begins with a  consonant sound.

Write

5. Match the images with the words. Write a or an.Relaciona las imágenes con las palabras. Escribe a o an.

Example:an airport a hospital

office museum Italian restaurant

internet cafe bank school

 _____ _______________ _____ ______________

359

Page 360: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 360/415

  _____ _______________ _____ ______________

 _____ _______________ _____ ______________

Escribe sobre los lugares públicos que hay en tu colonia y dibújalos.6. Write about the public places in your neighbourhood and draw them.

In my neighbourhood there is _____________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

360

Page 361: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 361/415

2. Read the information.Lee la información.

Lesson 3

A brochure with interesting places

Read

1. Choose an option and write the missing word.Elige una opción y escribe la palabra que falta.

a) e-mailb) letter

c) brochure

Lorena: Hi Martha. Guess what? I have something for you.Martha: Really? What is it?Lorena: It’s a _________________about Puebla. I hope you like it.

 Puebla is a small and clean city in

Mexico which attracts a lot of touristevery year. There are many beautifulplaces to visit like the Cathedral indowntown; the Angelopolis mall

  which is the biggest in the city; the  most interesting archaeological site,  Cholula; in the markets you can eat traditional dishes and buy handcrafts;the Fuertes de Loreto y Guadalupe

  which are a historical site. Also you  can go to the Safari zoo where you  can see free animals. Puebla is a

good option to have a wonderfulvacation.

361

Page 362: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 362/415

3. Answer the questions.

 _____________________________________________________________ 

Contesta las preguntas.

a) Where is Puebla? ____________________________________________

b) What does Puebla look like? ____________________________________ c) Write the places you can visit in Puebla ___________________________ 

d) What’s the name of the place where animals live free? _______________e) What can you do in traditional markets? ___________________________

Think

4. Complete the sentence.

Completa el enunciado.

a) We use the definite article ________ when we talk about a specific thing in  singular or plural. For example:

the apples the skirt

the shoes the car

a) Write the meaning of the in Spanish. _______________________________ 

Write

5. Complete the sentences with a, an, the.

Completa los enunciados con a, an, the.

a) ______ biggest mall in Puebla is Angelopolis.b) There is ______ Italian restaurant next to the bank.c) In ______ market you can eat traditional dishes.d) Safari is a zoo where ______ animals live free.e) Puebla is ______ good option to have a wonderful vacation.

362

Page 363: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 363/415

6. Make a brochure about a place you like and know. Follow the examplefrom exercise two.

Elabora un folleto acerca de un lugar que te guste y que conozcas. Sigueel ejemplo del ejercicio dos.

 _____________________________

 _____________________________ _____________________________

 _______________________

 _____________________________ _____________________________ _____________________________ _____________________________

 _____________________________ _____________________________

 _____________________________ _____________________________

Is there a bank near here?

Read

1. Complete the series of numbers.Completa la serie de números.

10th9th Nineth8th7th Seventh6th5th4th Fourth3er Third2nd1st First

Lesson 4

363

Page 364: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 364/415

2. Read the dialogue and write on the lines the missing words.

Woman: Yes, there is one on the second floor.

Martha’s mother: Is there a bank over here?

Lee el diálogo y escribe sobre las líneas las palabras que faltan.

Martha’s mother: Excuse me. Is there a beauty parlor in this mall?

Martha’s mother: And, are there any shoe stores?Woman: Yes, there are three on the third floor.

Woman: Yes, there is one on the first floor and one in the fourth floor.Martha’s woman: Is there a post office?Woman: No, there isn’t.Martha’s mother: Are there any restaurants on the first floor?Woman: No, there aren’t. They are on the fifth floor.

 _______________________ 

 ________________________ 

364

Page 365: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 365/415

3. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

a) Is there a bank on the first floor? _________________________________ 

b) Is there a restaurant on the fourth floor? ___________________________c) Are there three shoe stores on the third floor? ______________________d) Are there two post offices on the second floor? _____________________e) Is there a beauty parlor on the fifth floor? __________________________f) Where’s the beauty parlour? ____________________________________ 

Think

4. Classify the words in bold in the dialogue.Clasifica las palabras en negritas en el diálogo.

Singular Plural

Question ________________ ________________ 

affirmative Answer 

  negative  ________________ ________________ 

Speak

a) What’s your name? ___________________________________________ b) What’s the name of your town? __________________________________ c) Is there a supermarket in your town? _____________________________ 

e) Is there a market in your town? __________________________________ f) Is there a hospital in your town? __________________________________ 

d) Are there any shoe stores in your town? ___________________________

g) Are there any schools in your town? ______________________________

5. Interview a classmate.Entrevista a un compañero.

365

Page 366: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 366/415

Usa la información del ejercicio cinco para escribir un texto.

1. Write the missing public places according to the dialogue.

Write

6. Use the information from exercise five to write a text.

Example:

In Angelica’s town there are three schools. Also there is a park and a biglibrary. There isn’t any mall but there is a supermarket. There are five shoestores…

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

Where is the bank?

Read

Escribe los lugares públicos que faltan de acuerdo con el diálogo.

Lesson 5

Zar 

 ___________

ago

Marketa

z

 ____________

t.S

366

Page 367: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 367/415

Policeman: Yes, there is one on Zaragoza street.Martha’s father: And where is Zaragoza street?

Martha’s father: Thanks. Is there a book store over here?

a) Martha’s father is asking for a park. _______________b) There is a book store on Zaragoza street. _______________

d) The tourist information stand is next to the bank. _______________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Martha’s father: Excuse me. Is there a bank near here?

Policeman: It’s three blocks from here.

Policeman: Yes, there is one next to the bank.Martha’s father: Finally, where can I buy some tourist brochures?Policeman: In the tourist information stand. There’s one in front of the

  market.Martha’s father: Thank you very much.

Write

3. Write True or False.Escribe True (verdadero) o False (falso).

c) There is a bank next to the market. _______________

e) The book store is in front of the tourist information stand.______________ 

367

Page 368: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 368/415

a) ____________________________________________?

5. Order the sentences to write a dialogue.

Lulu: _________________________________________________________ 

Trabaja en parejas. Actúa el diálogo del ejercicio cinco.

Think

4. Write expressions used to ask for a place. Use the information in thedialogue.

Escribe las expresiones utilizadas para preguntar por un lugar. Usa lainformación en el diálogo.

b) ____________________________________________?c) ____________________________________________?d) ____________________________________________?

Write

Ordena las oraciones para hacer un diálogo.

How can I get there?

Excuse me. Where’s the nearest supermarket?

Thanks. I prefer walking.

You can walk for six blocks or take a taxi. It’s on Nelson Avenue.

Lulu: _________________________________________________________Policeman: ____________________________________________________

Policeman: ____________________________________________________Lulu: _________________________________________________________

Speak

6. Work in pairs. Act out the dialogue from exercise five.

368

Page 369: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 369/415

Lesson 6

This is a map of my town

Lee el correo electrónico y escribe   junto al mapa de la colonia deMartha.

2. Read the e-mail.

Read

1. Read the e-mail and put a next to the map of Martha’s neighbourhood.

map 1

Lee el correo electrónico.

Martha’s mother: What are you doing Martha?Martha: I’m writing an e-mail to my friend Susana in Mexico City.

369

Page 370: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 370/415

  From: [email protected]  To: [email protected]

  Subject: Greetings from Puebla

Dear Susana,

Regards

I want to tell you about my new home in Puebla. The town where I live isnice. There is a big hospital where my father works. There is a market wheremy mom buys all they need to cook. There is a park and sometimes I go toplay with my new friend Lorena. The school where I study is beautiful andthere are many teachers, they are friendly and nice. There are many officesupplies to buy all the materials I need for my homework. There is a smallchurch. In Puebla there are a lot of them. There are two banks and there is

one Internet cafe. I miss you a lot. I hope you’re O.K.

Martha

Completa el cuadro.

Negative

Write

3. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

a) What does Martha’s father do? __________________________________ b) Where do Martha and her family live now? _________________________ c) What are Martha’s teachers like? ________________________________d) Write some of the places there are in Martha’s town. _________________

 _____________________________________________________________ e) Where do Martha and Lorena go to play? __________________________

Think

4. Complete the chart.

Affirmative

Singular There isn’tPlural There aren’t

370

Page 371: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 371/415

Write

a bank a church

a library a pharmacy

 an office supply a market

a school a park

a hospital a bakery

an Internet cafe an Italian restaurant

6. Imagine you are going to send an e-mail to your friend in another City.Draw a map of your town including the places you ticked and complete the e-mail.

Imagina que vas a mandar un correo electrónico a un amigo en otraciudad. Dibuja un mapa de tu pueblo incluyendo los lugares que marcaste ycompleta el correo electrónico.

5. Put a next to the public places there are in your town.

Escribe  junto a los lugares públicos que hay en tu comunidad.

371

Page 372: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 372/415

  From: ___________________________________________   To: _____________________________________________   Subject: _________________________________________ 

Dear __________________

I want to tell you about my town. ___________________________________  ______________________________________________________________  ______________________________________________________________  ______________________________________________________________  ______________________________________________________________ 

Regards _______________________ 

Lesson 7

Read

1. Underline the cognates in the text.Subraya los cognados del texto

2. Read the information.Lee la información.

VISIT MEXICO CITY

Mexico is the biggest City in the world. Thereare many  interesting museums, beautiful oldhouses and monuments on many streets indowntown. Also there are many beautifulparks, a big zoo, lots of   modern shoppingmalls and excellent restaurants of typicalMexican food and international food. There isa big airport for visitors from all the MexicanRepublic and from other countries. Also thereare many friendly people.

Mini Check

372

Page 373: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 373/415

Write

c) There is just one restaurant in Mexico City. ________________d) People from other countries visit Mexico City. ________________

4. Complete the sentence.

Shoe store

Bakery

3. Write True or False.Escribe True (verdadero) o False (falso).

a) Mexico is the biggest City in the World. ________________b) In Mexico City there are many airports. ________________

e) The museums in Mexico City are interesting. ________________

Think

Completa el enunciado.

a) These words are synonyms and we use them when we talk aboutsomething in abundance. ______________ and _____________.

Write

5. Match the items with the stores that correspond.Relaciona los artículos con las tiendas que correspondan.

Bookstore

Office supply

373

Page 374: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 374/415

Lee el texto y escribe sobre las líneas las palabras que faltan en eledificio.

In this big shopping mall there are many places. On the first floor there aretwo banks and a restaurant. On the second floor there is a nice beauty parlorand a gymnasium. On the third floor there are lots of cloth stores. On thefourth floor there is one pharmacy and a supermarket On the fifth floor thereis a bakery and a cafeteria. On the sixth floor there is a big parking lot.

6th

6. Read the text and write on the lines the missing words in the building.

 ______________________ ____________________

5th

4th

 _______________________ 

3

rd

  ____________________

2nd

 ____________________ 

1st

374

Page 375: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 375/415

Lesson 8

The park is on Allende Street

 ______________________ _____________________

Read

1. Write the corresponding words below the pictures. Use the prepositions:between, next to, on, in front of  and the expression on the corner of .

Escribe las palabras correspondientes debajo de los dibujos. Usa las preposiciones: next to, on, in front of  y la expresión on the corner of .

 ___________________ __________________ __________________

375

Page 376: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 376/415

3. Answer the questions.

Write

Contesta las preguntas.

a) Where’s the book store? _______________________________________ b) How many banks are there in the town? ___________________________c) Where’s the park? ____________________________________________d) Who is Martha’s new friend? ____________________________________ e) Where are the banks? _________________________________________ 

Think

4. Complete the answers.Completa las respuestas.

Singular:a) Where’s the market? __________ between the library and the officesupply.Plural:b) Where are the banks? _________ on Zapata Street.

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Martha’s father: Martha, do you know where’s the pharmacy? I need buy

some medicines.Martha: Yes, it’s next to the book store.

Martha: There are two in the town. They’re on Zapata Street. One of them ison the corner of Zapata Street and Morelos Avenue. The other oneis at the end of the street. Dad, can I go to play to the park withLorena?

Martha’s father: Where’s the park?Martha: It’s on Allende Street, in front of the book store.Martha’s father: I can see you know the town very well.Martha: Yes, my new friend Lorena showed it to me.

Martha’s father: Yes, you can go to the park but be carefully.

376

Martha’s father: I also need to go to the bank. Where can I find one?

Page 377: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 377/415

Write

Utiliza las palabras en negritas del ejercicio dos y escríbelas en el lugarque les corresponda.

Speak

Student A

5. Use the words in bold from exercise two and write them on the place thatcorresponds.

6. Work in pairs to ask and answer about the places located in the map fromexercise five. Follow the example.

Trabaja en parejas para preguntar y responder acerca de los lugaresubicados en el mapa del ejercicio cinco. Sigue el ejemplo.

Student B

Excuse me. Where’sa pharmacy?

It’s on Zapata street,between the churchand the book store.

377

Page 378: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 378/415

Look at the map

Read

1. Underline the corresponding answer.Subraya la respuesta correspondiente.

 A) What kind of text is it?

a) A brochure b) An advertisement

2. Read the advertisement.Lee el anuncio.

Martha: Look mom, there is a new shop in the town.Martha’s mother: Let me see.

Lesson 9

378

Page 379: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 379/415

FASHIONOpens its doors to all young

people.* Opening also on weekends.

* 15% discount on skirts and

 jackets.

* 20% discount on jeans and

T-shirts.

LOOK ATTHE MAP TO

GET THERE!

Write

Contesta las preguntas.

b) When does the shop open? _____________________________________ 

Think

3. Answer the questions.

a) What’s the name of the shop? ___________________________________

c) What kind of people is the shop for? ______________________________ d) What can you buy in the shop? __________________________________ e) What does the advertisement include to get to the shop? ______________

4. Read the sentences.Lee los enunciados.

a) The shop opens on Sunday.b) The shop is on Juarez Street.c) This word has different meaning because of the context. __________

379

Page 380: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 380/415

Write

5. Match the columns.Relaciona las columnas.

 _____ In this store you can buy chocolate doughnuts and bread. _____ In this store you can buy aspirins, alcohol and bandages. _____ Is the store where you buy tomatoes, potatoes and carrots. _____ If you need some sheets of paper, or a pencil you can go to this store. _____ If you need a new pair of shoes you can visit this store. _____ Is the store where you can buy books.

a) A greengrocer.b) An office supply.c) A bakery.d) A pharmacy.e) A book store.f) A shoe store.

6. Choose one of the stores. Create an advertisement similar to the one inexercise two. Make a map to get there.

Elige una de las tiendas. Crea un anuncio similar al del ejercicio dos. Hazun mapa para llegar ahí.

380

Page 381: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 381/415

  the town?

Martha: From the monument go straight on Sonora Street. Turn right on

  bakery. Would you like to visit the store with my mom and me?

Lesson 10

Go straight, turn left, turn right

Read

1. Write the words under the corresponding signal.Escribe las palabras debajo de la señal correspondiente.

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Ring, ring.Martha: Hello.Lorena: Hi Martha. This is Lorena. Do you know about the new cloth store in

Martha: Yes, I have an advertisement about it.Lorena: How can I get there?

Chiapas Avenue. Go straight and turn left on Veracruz Street. Gostraight and turn left again on Yucatan Avenue. It’s next to the

Lorena: Yes, of course.

381

Page 382: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 382/415

FASHIONOpens its doors to all young

people.* Opening also on weekends.

* 15% discount on skirts and

 jackets.

* 20% discount on jeans and

T-shirts.

LOOK ATTHE MAP TO

GET THERE!

a) Go straight in your Spanish means: ______________________________ 

c) Turn right in Spanish means: ___________________________________ 

Write

3. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

b) Turn left in Spanish means: ____________________________________

d) Does Lorena have and advertisement of the new store? ______________e) Who is Lorena going to visit the new store with? ____________________

Think

4. Underline the corresponding answer.Subraya la respuesta correspondiente.

 A) The expressions in bold in the dialogue are…a) suggestions.b) directions.c) adjectives.

382

Page 383: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 383/415

Write

5. Read the directions, mark the way with a different color and write the placewhere you get.

Lee las direcciones, marca el camino con un color diferente y escribe ellugar a donde llegas.

OFFICESUPPLY BAKERY BANK

SHOESTORE

PARK

BUSSTATION

BOOKSTORE

SCHOOL LIBRARYYou are

here

a) Go straight for three blocks. Turn left, it’s next to the shoe store.________b) Go straight for one block. Turn left and go straight for two blocks. Turnright and go straight for two blocks. It’s on your left. ____________________c) Go straight for two blocks. Turn left, it’s across from the street, next to thebook store._____________d) Go straight for one block. Turn left and go straight for two blocks. It’s infront of the bus station. _________________________ 

383

Page 384: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 384/415

6. Draw a map of your town and mark the way from your house to yourschool. Write the directions. Include the public places in the map.

Dibuja el mapa de tu comunidad y marca el camino de tu casa a tu

escuela. Escribe las direcciones. Incluye lugares públicos en el mapa.

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

Welcome to my school

a) How well do you know your school? ______________________________ 

Lesson 11

Read

1. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

b) What’s the name of your school? ________________________________ 

384

Page 385: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 385/415

c) How many students are in your school? ___________________________ d) How many teachers are in your school? ___________________________ 

Lee el diálogo.

Martha: First, let’s write the name of the school at the top of the poster.

Lorena: We also can use some illustrations, draw a map and write the

  newspaper. Also we can put the poster in downtown for people meet

2. Read the dialogue.

Lorena: O.K. Let’s start making the poster for the school mural newspaper.

Pablo: Then let’s write “The best school in the town”.Sandy: That’s a good idea. After that, let’s write the characteristics of our 

  school.

telephone number of the school.Martha: That sounds great. Finally we will put the poster on the school mural

  our school.

SECUNDARIA 380

“BENITO JUAREZ”

“THE BEST SCHOOL IN THE TOWN”We have many subjects each day. 300 students say,

We have classes from 7:30 to 13:40. “This is a great

Some subjects are: School” 

ther activities are: Music and

ancing.

address is: 34 Madero Street,

Juan.

Telephone number:

34-21-00-56

*Spanish *English

*Mathematics *Computers *History

O

  D

  Our

San

SecondarySchool“BenitoJuarez”

Post officeGreengrocerOffice suply

385

Page 386: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 386/415

Write

d) What’s the reason to put the poster in downtown? ___________________

Think

4. Write the sequence words, they are in the dialogue.Escribe las palabras que indican secuencia, están en el diálogo.

e) Does your school have extra activities? _______________ Which ones? _____________________________________________________________

3. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

a) What are the students doing? ___________________________________ b) What does the poster include? __________________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________c) Where are the students going to put the poster? ____________________

 _____________________________________________________________

 _____________________________________________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________

Write

5. Answer the questions about your school.Contesta las preguntas acerca de tu escuela.

a) What’s the name and number of your school? ______________________ b) How many students does it have? ________________________________ c) Write the address. ____________________________________________ d) Write the telephone number. ____________________________________ 

f) Write the subjects your school has. _______________________________ g) What time do classes start? ____________________________________h) What time do classes finish? ____________________________________i) Who is the principal at your school? _______________________________ 

386

Page 387: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 387/415

6. Work in groups to make a poster about your school. You can make a draftin this space.

Trabaja en grupos para hacer un póster acerca de tu escuela. Puedeshacer un borrador en este espacio.

Lesson 12

How can I get to the gas station?

Read

1. Read the dialogue and draw the way on the map.Lee el diálogo y dibuja el camino en el mapa.

387

Page 388: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 388/415

OFFICESUPPLY PHARMACY

GASSTATION

FIRST STREET

MARKETSECOND STREET

BAKERYSHOESTORE

THIRD STREET

SUPERMARKET BANK

FOURTH STREET

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Martha’s father: Excuse me. How can I get to the nearest gas station?

Policeman: Well, go straight for two blocks on Fourth Street and turn right.  Go straight and turn right on Third Street.

Policeman: No, it isn’t. Go straight for two blocks and turn left. Go straight

  turn right.

Policeman: It’s near. Go straight and turn right on First Street. Go straight

Martha’s father: I think yes. Thanks.

Martha’s father: Is the gas station there?

and turn left on Second Street. Go straight for two blocks and

Martha’s father: And where’s the gas station?

and the gas station is on your left. Do you understand?

Policeman: You’re welcome.

388

Page 389: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 389/415

Write

3. Answer the questions.

a) Where do you get with the first direction from the policeman? __________

b) Where do you get with the second direction from the policeman? _______

c) Where do you get with the last one direction? ______________________

 _____________________________________________________________

a) What’s the meaning of “How can I get to…”? in Spanish?

Write

Contesta las preguntas.

 _____________________________________________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________ 

d) Write the shortest direction to get to the gas station? _________________

Think

4. Answer the question.Contesta la pregunta.

 ____________________________________________________

5. Order the expressions to write a dialogue.Ordena las expresiones para escribir un diálogo.

Excuse me. Is there an office supply over here?

Go straight on Pink Avenue and turn left. Go straight for two blocks. It’son your right.

Yes, there is one on Red Street.

How can I get there?

Thank you.

You’re welcome.

389

Page 390: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 390/415

Robert: _______________________________________________________Policeman: ____________________________________________________Robert: _______________________________________________________ 

Policeman: ____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Robert: _______________________________________________________ Policeman: ____________________________________________________

You: How can I get to ___________________________?

 _____________________________________________________________

Classmate: ___________________________________________________

Read

6. Look at the map on exercise one. In pairs, ask and answer questions likethis and write them.

Observa el mapa del ejercicio uno. En parejas, haz y responde preguntascomo ésta y escríbelas.

Student A

Student B

Classmate: ____________________________________________________ 

You: ____  ____________________________________?

 _____________________________________________________________ 

Lesson 13

How can I get tothe bakery?

Go straight for twoblocks and turn right.

Go straight, it’s onThird Street.

How can I get to The Palace of Fine Arts?

1. Write the corresponding words under the illustrations.Escribe las palabras correspondientes debajo de las ilustraciones.

390

Page 391: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 391/415

  Avenue. It’s on your right. You could see it. It’s very big and

Policewoman: No because is so far. But you can take a taxi or the subway.

 __________________________ __________________________

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Tourist: Excuse me. How can I get to The Palace of Fine Arts?Policewoman: Go straight until 5 de Mayo Street and turn left. Then go

  straight for three blocks and turn right on Lazaro Cardenas

beautiful.Tourist: Thanks. And Where’s the Monument of the Revolution?Policewoman: It’s on Republic Avenue.Tourist: Can I get walking from here?

Tourist: O.K. Thanks, you are so kind.

Write

3. Write True or False.Escribe True (verdadero) o False (falso).

a) The Palace of Fine Arts is on Republic Avenue. __________b) The Tourist is asking for the Monument of the Revolution.__________c) The policewoman isn’t kind. __________d) The Palace of Fine Arts isn’t small and ugly. __________e) The Palace of Fine Arts is on Lazaro Cardenas Avenue. __________

391

Page 392: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 392/415

Think

4. Complete the sentence with information from the dialogue.Completa el enunciado con información del diálogo.

a) This word indicates a sequence. ________________

Write

5. Look at the map and answer the questions.Observa el mapa y contesta las preguntas.

7

2

3

4

6

1

5

1 The Monumento of the Revolution2 The Fronton Mexico3 Museum of Franz Mayer4 The Main Post office5 The Senate6 The House of Tiles7 The Monument of Christopher Columbus

a) How can I get to the Monument of Christopher Columbus from theMonument of the Revolution? _____________________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________ 

392

Page 393: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 393/415

b) How can I get to the House of Tiles from the Palace of Fine Arts? _____________________________________________________________ c) How can I get to the Senate from the Museum of Franz Mayer?

 _____________________________________________________________ 

Speak

6. Use the map from exercise five. Work in pairs, one student give directions,and the other student is the tourist.

Usa el mapa del ejercicio cinco. Trabaja en parejas.Un estudiante dará lasinstrucciones y otro será el turista.

Read

1. Look the images and write on the lines the corresponding words.

 You are at: The tourist wants to go to:The Monument of the Revolution The Fronton MexicoThe Senate The Palace of Fine Artsthe corner of Reforma Avenue andHidalgo Avenue.

The Main Post Office

The Museum of Franz Mayer The House of Tiles

Lesson 14

Observa las imágenes y escribe sobre las líneas las palabras quecorrespondan.

Whales Hummingbird Elephant Seahorses Giraffe

Mini Check

393

Page 394: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 394/415

  _______________ ______________

2. Look at the images and write the words in the corresponding place.Observa las imagenes y escribe las palabras en el lugar correspondiente.

elephant house bird house aquarium restaurant gorilla house park

394

Page 395: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 395/415

3. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

a) How can I get to the elephant house from the gorilla house? ___________

 _____________________________________________________________ b) How can I get to the aquarium from the restaurant? __________________ _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________c) How can I get to the park from the snakes? ________________________

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

Prepositions

d) It’s between the elephant house and the aquarium. __________________e) Are in front of the gorilla house. __________________________________

Think

4. Complete the chart.Completa el cuadro.

Directions Questions

Write

Completa los diálogos.

Tourist: Thank you.

5. Complete the dialogues.

 A)Tourist: Excuse me. Where’s the bird house?Margarita: It’s _________________________________________________.

Margarita: ____________________________________________________.

395

Page 396: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 396/415

B)Tourist: Excuse me. ____________________________________________?Luis: Go straight. Turn right and go straight. It’s at the end of the way, next to

the park.

Luis: You’re welcome.

Escribe There is/There are sobre las líneas.

a) There is

Tourist: __________________________.

6. Write There is/There are on the lines.

What animals are in a zoo?

a lion.

Read

b) _____________________ an elephant.c) _____________________ many monkeys.d) _____________________ crocodiles.e) _____________________ a jaguar.f) _____________________ snakes.g) _____________________ a toucan.

Lesson 15

How can I get to your house?

1. Complete the birthday’s card with information from the dialogue.Completa la tarjeta de cumpleaños con información del diálogo.

HAPPY BIRTHDAY

I invite you to my party.

Name: _____________________Date: _____________________

Hour: _____________________

Address: ___________________

396

Page 397: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 397/415

2. Read the dialogue.Lee el diálogo.

Lorena: Hello boys and girls. I want to invite you to my birthday’s party.Hugo: When is it?Lorena: It’s next Saturday at four o’clock in my house.Sandy: And, where’s your house?Lorena: It’s on 27 Veracruz Street.Pablo: How can we get there?Lorena: From the secondary school go straight on Tlaxcala Avenue for three  blocks. Turn right on Veracruz Street and go straight. It’s at the end  of the street on your left. You can take your favorite music.Martha: And don’t forget the gifts. Ha, ha, ha.

Write

3. Answer the questions.Contesta las preguntas.

a) Who is inviting to the birthday’s party? ____________________________ b) When is the birthday’s party? ___________________________________ c) Where is the birthday’s party? ___________________________________d) Who are the guests to the party? ________________________________ e) What’s the address of Lorena’s house? ___________________________ 

397

Page 398: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 398/415

Think

4. Answer the question.Contesta la pregunta.

a) Which is the reason of the name: Wh-questions words? _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

Write

5. Create your own birthday’s card and draw a map to get to your house.Crea tu propia tarjeta de cumpleaños y dibuja un mapa para llegar a tu

casa.

 _______________________________MAP

6. Write the directions to get to your house from the school.Escribe las direcciones para llegar a tu casa desde la escuela.

 _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________

398

Page 399: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 399/415

Lesson 16

Project: A travel brochure. Part one

Presenting the general idea.Presentando la idea general.

1. Discuss with your class and teacher the idea to produce a brochure or anadvertisement about a town, city or country in order to know different places.

Discute con tus compañeros y maestro la idea de producir un folleto o unanuncio acerca de un pueblo, ciudad o país para conocer diferentes lugares.

2. Form groups and get ideas about the places they would like to research

about.  Formen grupos y den ideas acerca de los lugares que les gustaríainvestigar.

3. For homework bring in the corresponding information.De tarea traer la información correspondiente.

 Acapulco A brochure  Anadvertisement

399

Page 400: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 400/415

Producing the brochure or advertisement.

Lesson 17

Project: A travel brochure. Part two

Produciendo el folleto o anuncio.

1. The members of the groups will share the information they brought and willorganize it.

Los miembros de los equipos compartirán la información obtenida y laorganizarán.

2. Make a draft with the information that will be included in the brochure or

advertisement.  Elaboren un borrador con la información que incluirán en el folleto oanuncio.

3. Design the structure. Illustrate your brochure or advertisement to make itmore attractive.

Diseñen la estructura de ellos. Ilustren su folleto o anuncio para hacerlomás atractivo.

4. Answer and use next questions as a guide.Contesta y usa las siguientes preguntas como guía.

a) What’s the name of the place you are going to promote?______________ _____________________________________________________________ b) Where is it? _________________________________________________c) How can you get there? ________________________________________d) Make a map of the place including names of the streets and avenues, allthe public places there are, the places to visit, etc.e) What are the mainly attractions and places for accommodation? ________

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

400

Page 401: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 401/415

5. For homework you will bring the material you will need like sheets of paperin different colors, scissors, glue, pictures, etc.

De tarea traerán el material que necesitarán, por ejemplo hojas de

colores, tijeras, resistol, dibujos para ilustrar, etcétera.

Lesson 18

Project: A travel brochure. Part three

Making the brochure or advertisement.Haciendo el folleto o anuncio.

1. With the material required each student in each group will produce thetravel brochure or advertisement with the information from the last class andwill illustrate it. Write the name of the place, its characteristics, how people

can get there, etc. Form groups and get ideas about the places they wouldlike to research about. Suggestion: make a nice and cleanness of your work.

Con el material requerido cada alumno del equipo producirá el folleto oanuncio con la información de la clase anterior y lo ilustrará. Escribe elnombre del lugar, sus características, cómo la gente puede llegar ahí, etc.Sugerencia: Usen una bonita escritura y cuiden la limpieza de su trabajo.

401

Page 402: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 402/415

Lesson 19

Project: A travel brochure. Part four

Editing the brochure or advertisementEditando el folleto o anuncio

 After you finish your brochure or advertisement you have to check it with yourteacher. He will check the structure, the illustrations and the content. If youhave a mistake you have to correct it. If it is necessary you most do youradvertisement or brochure again with new material. Each student in yourgroup will do the same as you. When you have done all the corrections youcan make copies of your texts and bring them for next class.

Después de terminar tu folleto o anuncio tienes que revisarlo con tu maestro.Él revisará la estructura, las ilustraciones y el contenido. Si tienes algún errortienes que corregirlo. Si es necesario debes hacer tu folleto o anuncionuevamente. Cada alumno en tu grupo hará lo mismo que tú. Cuando hallanhecho todas las correcciones pueden sacar fotocopias de sus textos ytraerlos para la siguiente clase.

Lesson 20

Project: A travel brochure. Part five

Sharing textsCompartiendo los textos

1. In this class you will exchange your brochures or advertisements with yourclassmates in order to know about the place they promote. After read themyou will answer some questions.

En esta clase intercambiarán sus folletos o anuncios con sus compañeros para saber acerca del lugar que promocionan. Después de leerloscontestarán algunas preguntas.

2. Answer next questions.Contesta las siguientes preguntas.

a) What’s the place you are interested in? ___________________________b) Where is it? _________________________________________________ c) Would you like to visit it? _______________________________________ d) Why? ______________________________________________________

402

Page 403: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 403/415

Review

1. Use the adjectives to describe your town.Usa los adjetivos para describir a tu comunidad.

Lesson 21

small important clean

noisy quiet

polluted

attractive big

 _____________________________________________________________ 

 _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ 

2. Read the description and write the missing public places on the map.Lee la descripción y escribe los lugares públicos que faltan en el mapa.

In my town there is a big park in front of my school. There are two banks onRed Street. There is a gymnasium between the pharmacy and the bakery. Isometimes go to do exercise. Also there is a market where my mom buys all

she needs to cook. There is a greengrocer on the corner of yellow Street andBlue Avenue. There is an office supply on Pink Avenue and a post office nextto it. I like my town very much.

403

Page 404: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 404/415

PHARMACY ___________ BAKERY ___________  

YELLOW STREET

 ___________ 

BLUE

 A

MARKET

PINK

 A

GREEN STREET EN

V V

EN

SCHOOLUE OFFICE

SUPPLY

UE

RED STREET ___________  

 ___________ __________ 

3. Write the directions to the signals.Escribe las direcciones de las señales.

404

Page 405: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 405/415

4. Look at the map and answer the questions. Use a different color to markeach way.

Observa el mapa y contesta las preguntas. Usa un color diferente para

marcar cada camino.

BAKERY SCHOOLO AX

MORELOS STREET AC

GREENGROCER

 A

 APARK

TLAXCALA STREET V

E

  C

H

BANK PHARMACY

  I

 A

POST APOFFICE

SPU

VERACRUZ STREET

EBL

 A

BOOKSTORE

OFFICESUPPLY

VE

 A

MUSEUM  YOU AREHERE STREETHIDALGO

MARKET V A

E

SHOESTORE

a) How can I get to the school? ____________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________

b) How can I get to the bakery? ____________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________c) How can I get to the park? ______________________________________

 _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________

405

Page 406: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 406/415

d) How can I get to the market? ____________________________________  _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________

5. Use the same map to complete the sentences.Usa el mismo mapa para completar los enunciados.

a) It’s on the corner of Oaxaca Avenue and Tlaxcala Street. _____________b) It’s in front of the office supply. __________________________________ c) It’s between the post office and the bank. __________________________ d) It’s on Morelos Street, next to the school. __________________________ e) It’s next to the book store. ______________________________________f) They’re on Veracruz Street. _____________________________________ 

6. Read the descriptions and find the places in the puzzle. Write them on thelines.

Lee las descripciones y encuentra los lugares en el crucigrama. Escríbelossobre las líneas.

a) In this place you can buy aspirin, alcohol and bandages. ______________b) In this place you can buy carrots, tomatoes and lettuce. _______________c) In this place you can buy pens, notebooks and pencils. _______________d) In this place you can cash checks and keep your money. _____________e) In this place you can buy stamps and send letters. ___________________f) In this place you can buy tennis shoes and shoes. ___________________g) In this place you can eat salad, hamburger and other delicious food.

 ____________________ h) In this place you learn about Mathematics, Spanish, English, and othersubjects. __________________

P G T F D H N C Y K D XO A S TR E T A U R A NS H S O R M RO E T E ST D R C F H NE A C U OO D B J O N A E G MU CF B F CE S H G J C R U

F A A S P H A R M A C YI O E B T O EN M A T CC T P CR A K D O H B FE Y OS C H O L I A E BD G H H J C E U I O P RO F IF C E S U P P L Y

406

Page 407: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 407/415

3.a) True

Lesson 7

1.

Answer Key/Respuestas

VISIT MEXICO CITY

Mexico is the biggest City in the world. There aremany interesting museums, beautiful old housesand monuments on many streets in downtown. Alsothere are many beautiful parks, a big zoo, lots of modern shopping malls and excellent restaurants of

typical Mexican food and international food. Thereis a big airport for visitors from all the MexicanRepublic and from other countries. Also there aremany friendly people.

b) Falsec) Falsed) Truee) True

4.a) many and lots of 

5.Bookstore

Shoe store

Bakery

Office supply

407

Mini Check

Page/página 372

Page/página 373

Page 408: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 408/415

6.6th

Bakery Cafeteria

5th

  Supermarket

4th

3rd

Beauty parlor 

2

nd

Bank

1st

408

Page/página 374

Page 409: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 409/415

Lesson 14

Seahorses

1.

Elephant Whales

Hummingbird Giraffe

2.

Elephant house aquariumpark

 

Bird house

Gorilla houserestaurant

409

Mini Check

Pages/páginas 393-394

Page/página 394

Page 410: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 410/415

3.

b) Go straight until the elephant house and turn right. It’s at the end of the

way.

d) The park.

a) Go straight until the aquarium and turn left. Go straight, it’s on your right.

c) Go straight and turn right. It’s between the elephant house and the  aquarium.

e) The restrooms.

4.Directions Prepositions Questions

go straight on How can I get to…?turn left next to Where is the…?

turn right between Where are the…?

in front ofon the corner of

5.

 A)Margarita: It’s next to the restrooms.Margarita: You’re welcome.

B)Tourist: How can I get to the aquarium?

Tourist: Thank you.

6.a) There is a lion.b) There isc) There ared) There aree) There isf) There areg) There is

410

Page/página 395

Page/página 396

Page 411: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 411/415

Review

2.

PHARMACY GYMNASIUMGREEN

GROCERBAKERY

YELLOW STREET

PARK

B

LUE

 A

P

INKMARKET

 A

EVVEGREEN STREETNNU

SCHOOLU

EOFFICESUPPLY

E

RED POSTOFFICE

STREET

BANK

 

BANK

411

Page/página 404

Page 412: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 412/415

3.

a) The park.

c) The pharmacy.d) The bakery.

f) The bank, the pharmacy and the post office.

6.a) Pharmacy

5.

b) The shoe store.

e) The museum.

b) Greengrocer c) Office supplyd) Banke) Post officef) Shoe storeg) Restauranth) School

G H C KP T F D N Y D XO  A R TE S A U R A N TS H O E S T O R E M R ST D R C E  A F H C N U OO D B J O N  A E G U C M

F B E S H C R CF G J UF  A  A S P H A R M A C YI O E N M B T A O T C EC T R P A K D O H C B FE Y S C H O O L I A E BD G C I OH H J E U P RO I C PF F E S U P L Y

Turn left Go straight Turn right

412

Page/página 404

Page/página 406

Page 413: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 413/415

Materiales de apoyo

Temas Material sugerido

Dar direcciones • Programa Sepainglés. Programa:  Directions para la lección 12.

Bibliografía

Beare, N., Links 1 Teacher´s Guide, México, Macmillan, 2005.

Celorio, G., Smash! 1, Teacher´s Resource Book,  México, Richmond

Publishing, 1997.

Domínguez, E., et al ., Connections one. Student´s Book,  México, Nuevo

México, 2006.

Emilsson, E., et al ., Dialogues. English 1, México, Fondo de Cultura

Económica, 2002.

Kirn, E., et al ., A Communicative Grammar, México, McGraw-Hill, 1996.Programas de Estudio. Educación básica. Secundaria. Lengua extranjera

Inglés,  México, SEP, 2006.

 Andrade, A., et. al., Checkmate 1, México, Macmillan, 2004.

Luna, M., et. al ., Rally 1, Student’s book, México, Macmillan, 2002.

413

Page 414: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 414/415

Page 415: Ingles Tomo i

8/21/2019 Ingles Tomo i

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ingles-tomo-i 415/415